Home

Mitsubishi Electronics LCD1760VM Computer Monitor User Manual

1. Q62P 8 1 E oven E H 100 120 200 240VAC oureursvocasa A K LW 2 2avoc o 5a HH CD rail O W 3 ool O 4 maose SS 18 At GP Q64P 8 1 Ka 7 200 240VAC seca ra 4 Co 3 w 4 Son LS 11 ANE 9 7 6 Q61P A2 12 1 7 24VDC H 2avoc 05a LY le ra 4 D 3 wa 4 DI __ 4 INPUT sage L en i 3 Q63P oe 9 gt N EI 50 60Fz 40VA OUTPUT 5VDC 2A 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q Application POWER LED 5VDC power indicator LED 1 Turned ON when the whole system operates normally 2 Turned OFF opened when a stop error occurs in the CPU module 2 ERR terminals 3 In a multiple CPU system configuration turned OFF when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU modules Normally off when loaded in an extension base unit FG terminal Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board r UG ierninal Grounding for the power supply filter The potential of Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q64P and Q61SP terminal is 1 2 of the input voltage S 24V 24G terminals Used to supply 24VDC power to inside the o
2. Corresponding ACPU bo TT Corresponding CPU SD739 to B8 B7 to BO SD738 2nd character 1st character SD739 4th character 3rd character SD740 6th character 5th character SD741 8th character 7th character SD742 10th character 9th character D743 12th character 11th character SD744 14th character 13th character SD745 16th character 15th character SD746 18th character 17th character SD747 20th character 19th character SD748 22nd character 21st character SD749 24th character 23rd character SD750 26th character 25th character SD751 28th character 27th character Message Message SD752 30th character 29th character S During storage storage SD753 32nd character 31st character execution New O SD754 34th character 33rd character SD755 36th character 35th character SD756 38th character 37th character SD757 40th character 39th character SD758 42nd character 41st character SD759 44th character 43rd character SD760 46th character 45th character SD761 48th character 47th character SD762 50th character 49th character SD763 52nd character 51st character SD764 54th character 53rd character SD765 56th character 55th character SD766 58th character 57th character SD767 60th character 59th character SD768 62nd character 61st character SD769 64th character 63rd character Designa
3. SD7 SD8 SD6 SD9 SD10 SD11 Vacant SD12 SD13 SD14 SD7 SD15 Program error location Number Meaning Zoe File name S Error New O Rem SD8 SD7 ASCII code 8 characters SD8 SD9 Extension 2EH SD10 ASCII code 3 characters SD11 Pattern x4 SD12 Block No SD9 SD13 Step No transition No SD14 Sequence step No L SD15 Sequence step No H 4 Contents of pattern data 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number Error 0 0 to 0 O gt K gt Error common D EN common S SFC block designation present i information Not used 1 absent 0 information SFC step designation present 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 Switch cause Number Meaning SD5 Switch cause 0 automatic switch 1 manual switch SD6 Switch direction 0 standby system to control system 1 control system to standby system SD7 Tracking flag 5 SD8 SD9 SD10 a Vacant SD13 SD14 S Error New Q4AR SD15 5 Tracking flag contents Shows whether or not the tracking data is valid 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number 0 0 to O 0 WD ___ Invalid work data Not used invalid 0 valid 1 System data i SFC active step information invalid 0 valid 1 Switching cause invalid 0 valid 1 Wal n Wal Wal Wal n S S S 9 S S Wu A wo N CH 11 67 11 67 1
4. D9125 D9126 D9127 annunciator numbers detected the ninth number is not stored into SD64 SD71 if detected D9128 D1128 SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SETSET SET SET Anquriciator F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151 F210 LEDR Annunciator NW WWW WW WW WV vx D9129 D9130 D9131 D9132 11 92 11 92 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List 10 Special register list dedicated for QnA ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification ZNRD LRDP for ACPU processing results i 7 p 7 8 ZNWR LWTP for ACPU processing results Local station link type i D SD1204 Link status 11 93 Corresponding Details CPU Meaning Stores the execution result of the ZNRD word device read instruction e ZNRD instruction setting fault Faulty setting of the ZNRD instruction constant source and or destination One of the stations is not communicating The specified station is a remote I O station 0 Normal end 2 ZNRD instruction setting fault 3 Error at relevant station 4 Relevant station ZNRD execution disabled e Corresponding station error e ZNRD cannot be executed in the corresponding station Stores the execution result of the ZNWR word device G Nommal ond write instruction 2 ZNWR instruction setting fault 3 Error at relevant station e LWTP instruction setting fault Faulty setting
5. 80 0 3 3 15 0 01 LS om d i 44 1 1 74 15 5 g 224 5 0 3 8 85 0 01 0 61 245 9 65 3 Main Base Unit Q38B 4 mountiong screws M4 x 14 MELSEC Q Unit mm inch Unit mm inch 98 3 86 ATD G o o o o o o o xj e Ji i i r aye Ply PP Py PE sv Tal ee ey dd de ty 1 dilh qla Ae A A o a E power eeu oa mell mell molt F6 3 15 0 01 75 amp 0 30 444 155 308 0 3 12 14 0 01 1 74 P Ee 328 12 92 gt App 10 Unit mm inch App 10 APPENDICES E 4 Main Base Unit Q312B 4 mountiong screws M4 x14 98 3 86 3 15 0 01 m 419 0 3 16 51 0 01 439 17 30 ests 1 E 0 30 44 1 SEH 15 5 Unit mm inch App 11 App 11 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 2 4 Slim type main base unit 1 Main Base Unit Q32SB i 754 he d 0 30 441 8 5 101203 j 1 74 0 33 H 3 98 0 01 114 4 49 4 mounting screws M4 x 12 a 98 3 86 3 15 0 01 0 28
6. eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeees 5 8 5 2 Names of Parts and SetU NS tevvects exces steve cli aaa a T teeth Ea aaraa EENEG UE ed 5 9 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE 6 1to6 11 6 1 Base Unit Specification Table 6 1 6 2 Extension Cable Specification Table cccceccecceceeseseeceeceeeeaeeaeceeseaeeaesaeseeeeaesaesaeeeeesaesaeseeseaesaseeseaeeaees 6 3 6 3 Parts Names ol Base Witt secs ez ciecnecsaten cde checs geesde deed 6 3 6 4 Setting the Extension Base Unit cccccecceseseeseeceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeaeeeecaeesaeeaecaeceeeaesaeseeeseseaesaeseeseataeseeeeeeeaees 6 6 A 7 A 7 6 5 WO Number Allocation cccccccccccccccccccceeecccccseeeesesesceceeaeeeeseeescceeeaaesseeessseeauaeeseseesueeessueeeesesesessssaeeeeeeess 6 7 6 6 Guideline for Use of Extension Base Units OG 6 8 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY 7 1to7 6 7 1 Memory Card Specifications A 7 1 7 2 Battery Specifications For CPU Module and SRAM Cart 7 2 7 3 Handling the Memory Card 7 3 7 4 The Names of The Parts of The Memory Can 7 4 7 5 Memory Card Loading Unloading Procedures ccsccecceeeeceeeeseeseceeceeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaesaesaeeeeeeaeeaeseeseaeeaaes 7 5 7 6 Installation of Battery For CPU Module and Memory Cant 7 6 8 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive 0 0 ec eeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeseeaseeseeseesaeeesaeeateee 8 1 8 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive 8 1 8 1 2 Installation instructions for EMC D
7. Perform the following Organize file YES Is it able to write a program Confirm memory space Confirm the writing destination specification NO YES Is it able to write a program Y Y 1 3 2 3 11 13 11 13 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Vv Format program memory 11 14 Y Is it able to write a program Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem y Completion MELSEC Q 11 14 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 15 Flowchart for when it is unable to perform boot operation from memory card 11 15 The following shows the flowchart that must be followed when the boot operation of the CPU module cannot be performed using the memory card Unable to perform boot operation Is there CPU module error Remove the cause of the error Is it able to perform boot operation Is the drive that stores the parameter file specified Set the DIP switch 2 and 3 to the drive in which the parameter file is stored Is it able to perform boot operation Is a file set with parameter boot file setup Set a file to boot file setup Is it able to perform boot operation Is a file set with parameter program setup Set a file to program setup Is it able to perform boot operation Is b
8. Proceed to Section 11 2 8 When the USER LED is turned on USER LED on Proceed to Section 11 2 9 BAT hes When the BAT LED is turned on Proceed to Section 11 2 10 Flowchart for when the BOOT LED is flickering BOOT LED flickering Proceed to Section 11 2 11 Output module LED not turned on p Flowchart for when output module LED is not turned on Proceed to Section 11 2 12 Flowchart for when output load of output module dose not turn on Proceed to Section 11 2 13 Flowchart for when unable to read a program x Proceed to Section 11 2 14 Unable to write a program i Flowchart for when unable to write a program Unable to perform boot operation een to SE D Seck from memoriy card owchart for when unable to perform boot operation from memory card Proceed to Section 11 2 16 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs CONTROL BUS ERR occurs Proceed to Section 11 2 17 Flowchart for when CONTROL BUS ERR occurs 11 2 11 2 UO module not operating properly Unable to read a program UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 2 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is not turned on The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the MODE LED of the CPU module does not turn on at PLC power on MODE LED is not turned on Is the power supply for all the
9. c Always use double shielded coaxial cables as the coaxial cables connected to the 10BASE2 connectors Earth the double shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to the ground Shield here Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield Ethernet is the registered trademark of XEROX Co LTD I O signal lines and other communication cables For the I O signal lines and other communication cables lines RS 232 RS 422 CC Link etc if extracted to the outside of the control panel also ensure to earth the shield section of these lines and cables in the same manner as in item 1 above 8 4 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 8 1 4 Power supply module Always ground the LG and FG terminals after short circuiting them 8 1 5 When using QA1S6 L B type base unit 1 Cable a Earthing of shielded cable e Earth the shield of the shielded cable as near the unit as possible taking care so that the earthed cables are not induced electromagnetically by the cable to be earthed e Take appropriate measures so the shield that was partly removed for exposure is earthed to the control panel over a large contact surface area A clamp may also be used as shown in the figure below In this case however apply a cover to the painted inner wall surface of the control panel which comes in contact with the clamp St section Note The method of earthing by soldering a wire onto the shield section of t
10. b Ideas for reducing voltage drops The following methods are effective to reduce voltage drops at the extension cables 1 Changing the module loading positions Load large current consumption modules on the main base unit Load small current consumption modules on the extension base unit 2 Using short extension cables The shorter the extension cable is the smaller the resistance and voltage drops are Use the shortest possible extension cables 2 When the base unit is of Q30SB Slim type power supply module Slim type main base unit Q61SP Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Peripheral devices converter cables etc for connection between CPU module and PC CPU module zi Q02 H CPU QO6HCPU etc __ O module QX10 QY10 etc __ Intelligent function module Q64AD QJ71LP21 25 etc 1 The CPU module is loaded on the Q3OSB slim type main base unit a To use the slim type main base unit and slim type power supply module pay attention to the capacity of the 5VDC power supply 1 The capacity of the 5VDC power supply of the power supply module Q61SP installed to the slim type main base unit is 2A Choose modules with total capacity of 2A or less 5VDC Rated output current Q61SP 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q 3 When the base unit is of QA1S6DB Power supply module Base unit A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P QA1S65B and QA1S68B UO module A1SX10 A1SY10 etc Special functi
11. 3 Install the base cover to the extension base unit and tighten the base cover screw Tightening torque 36 to 48N cm 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable 1 Instructions for handling an extension cable e Do not stamp an extension cable e An extension cable must be connected to the base unit when the base cover has been installed After you have set the extension number to the extension base unit reinstall and screw the base cover e When running an extension cable the minimum bending radius of the cable should be 55mm 2 17 inch or more If itis less than 55mm 2 17 inch a malfunction may occur due to characteristic deterioration open cable or the like e When connecting or disconnecting an extension cable do not hold the ferrite cores mounted at both ends of the cable Hold the connector part of the cable for connection or disconnection l Holding the ferrite core may cause the cable to open within the connector Also if the ferrite core is shifted the characteristic will change When handling the cable take care not to shift the ferrite core positions 2 Connection of extension cable POINT When connecting an extension base unit to the main base unit with an extension cable always plug the OUT side connector of the main base unit and the IN side connector of the extension base uni
12. 4 mounting screws M4 x14 Ir or ey Ry PE TE Y Mey E E T Wl ze yn POWER WOO 4 VOT 4 102 4 103 4 O4 o re a Q li L 98 3 86 J 800 3 3 15 0 01 15 5 222 5 0 3 8 77 0 01 0 61 245 9 65 Unit mm inch 5 Extension Base Unit Q68B 4 mounting screws M4 x14 el E SE S SI ERR 0 0 7 5 DS 0 30 44 4 a 1 74 15 55 306 0 3 12 06 0 01 d S 328 12 92 l Unit mm inch 6 Extension Base Unit Q612B 4 mounting screws M4 x14 A o OUT IT ARA NA j 7 ses oO roni S 2 98 3 86 80 0 3 3 15 0 01 7 0 7 5 eS 0 30 T 44 4 g 417 0 3 16 43 0 01 na ee 439 17 30 Unit mm inch App 14 App 14 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 7 Extension Base Unit QA1S65B 4 mounting screws M5 x25 Dez QA1S65B 130 5 12 295 0 3 11 62 0 01 315 12
13. TEHNIKON Oktjabrskaya 16 5 Ap 704 BY 220030 Minsk Phone 375 0 17 22 75 704 Fax 375 0 17 22 76 669 e mail tehnikon belsonet net BELGIUM BELARUS Getronics b v Control Systems Pontbeeklaan 43 B 1731 Asse Zellik Phone 32 0 2 467 17 51 Fax 32 0 2 467 17 45 e mail infoautomation getronics com TELECON CO BULGARIA 4 A Ljapchev Blvd BG 1756 Sofia Phone 359 0 2 97 44 05 8 Fax 359 0 2 97 44061 e mail INEA CR doo Drvinje 63 HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 0 1 36 67 140 Fax 385 0 1 36 67 140 e mail AutoCont Control Systems s r o Nemocnicni 12 CZ 702 00 Ostrava 2 Phone 420 59 6152 111 Fax 420 59 6152 562 e mail consys autocont cz CROATIA CZECHIA louis poulsen DENMARK industri amp automation Geminivej 32 DK 2670 Greve Phone 45 0 43 95 9595 Fax 45 0 43 9595 91 e mail pia lpmail com UTU Elektrotehnika AS P rnu mnt 160i EE 11317 Tallinn Phone 372 0 6 51 72 80 Fax 372 0 6 51 7288 e mail utu utu ee ESTONIA Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Ansatie 6a FIN 01740 Vantaa Phone 358 0 9 886 77 500 Fax 358 0 9 886 77 555 e mail info beijer fi MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westgate Business Park IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 419 88 00 Fax 353 0 1 419 88 90 e mail sales info meir mee com SIA POWEL LATVIA Lienes iela 28 LV 1009
14. e locations in a multiple CPU system are either of the n a multiple CPU system the control PLC of the intelligent function module incompatible with the multiple CPU system is set to other than station 1 There is no parameter file at the drive designated by DIP switches as a valid drive The contents of the boot file are incorrect There is no boot file in the drive designated by the parameter enabled drive switch even though the Boot DIP switch is ON 1 A memory card was removed without switching the memory card in out switch OFF 2 The memory card in out switch is turned ON although a memory card is not actually installed 1 The memory card has not been formatted 2 Memory card format status is incorrect A memory card that cannot be used with the CPU module has been installed Automatic write to standard ROM was performed on the CPU module that is incompatible with automatic write to standard ROM Memory card where automatic write to standard ROM was selected in the boot file was fitted and the parameter enable drive was set to the memory card 2300 2301 2302 The file designated at the PLC file settings in the parameters cannot be found The Ethernet parameter that was added for QnACPU with the function version B has been set to QnACPU without the function version B Remove the module installed at 65th or later slot Remove the module installed at the slot later than the number of slots
15. 1 Module mounting position For enhanced ventilation and ease of module replacement leave the following clearances between the module top bottom and structure parts a In case of main base unit or extension base unit Indicates the panel top wiring we duct or any part position LLL CR LLLLLLLLLL LLLLLL LUI pen A 1 18 inch or more x 1 Door LAT 20mm 30mm g 0 79 inch 1 18 inch or morex 3 UN B mee Sle y y H 5mm 0 20 inch or more 2 5mm 0 20 inch or more 1 For wiring duct with 50mm 1 97 inch or less height 40mm 1 58 inch or more for other cases x2 20mm 0 79 inch or more when the adjacent module is not removed and the extension cable is connected x3 80mm 3 15 inch or more for the connector type 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q b In case of slim type main base unit Indicates the panel top wiring duct or any part position GH EE i a 18 iia i y _ or more 1 Panel Door 7 BI 20 mm 30 mm 0 79 inch 1 18 inch or more 3 or more 7 H MM TT Ve 17 mm 0 67 inch or more 2 5 mm 0 20 inch or more 1 For wiring duct with 50 1 97 inch mm or less height 40 mm 1 58 inch or more for other cases 2 The cable of the power supply module of the slim type main base unit protrudes out of the left end of the module Install the module while reserving 17 mm 0 67 inch or m
16. 2n minute clock n 1 minute seconds clock x 1 minute clock indicates the name of the special relay M9034 of the ACPU 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC O Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details Relay Conversion Modification M9036 SM1036 Always ON ON e Used as dummy contacts of initialization and application OFF instruction in sequence program ON e SM1038 and SM1037 are turned on and off without M9037 SM1037 Always OFF OFF regard to position of key switch on CPU module front SM1038 and SM1039 are under the same condition as ON for 1 scan ON RUN status except when the key switch is at STOP M9038 SM1038 only after RUN OFF z el scan position and turned off and on Switched off if the key switch is in STOP position SM1038 is on for one scan ON Ti scan only and SM10339 is off for one scan only if the key switch 1 scan is not in STOP position RUN flag After M9039 _ SM1039 RUN OFF for 1 scan only OFF M9040 smio40 k ng PAUSE enable jOFF PAUSE disabled When RUN key switch is at PAUSE position or remote coil ON PAUSE enabled s R USE status OFF PAUSE not in effect pause contact has turned on and if SM204 is on PAUSE K mode is set and SM206 is turned on M9041 SM1041 SM204 ON PAUSE in effect i is tu STOP status OFF STOP not in effect Switched on when the RUN key switch or RUN STOP DE I PMI 9a SM203 ON _ STOP in effect switch is in STOP po
17. ee e or ee oe a es Hee Memory card a Flashoard Cd Standard RAM 2 Only one file register and one local device Standard ROM 28 La Io Ise o Standard ROM number of writings Max 100000 times sr T R Number of devices Number of I O device points 8192 points X Y0 to 1FFF usable on program Number of points Number of occupied I O points 4096 points X Y0 to FFF accesible to actual I O modules X 1 124 is the maximum number of programs that can be executed on High Performance model QCPU x2 The maximum number of sequence steps that can be executed for one program by the High Performance model QCPU with the parameters stored in another drive is calculated with the following expression Program size File header size default 34 steps Refer to the High Performance model QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for details on the program size and file x3 The memory capacity of the Q12HCPU or Q25HCPU whose first five digits of serial No are 02091 or earlier is 64K bytes Refer to Section 2 3 for the way to confirm the serial No x 4 The CPU shared memory is not latched The CPU shared memory is cleared when the power is turned on to the PLC or when the CPU module is reset x 5 The memory capacity of the QOQ2HCPU or QO6HCPU whose first five digits of serial No are 04011 or earlier is 64K bytes Refer to Section 2 3 for the way to confirm the serial No 4 1 4 1 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICA
18. eee eee 4 3 L tatth range ana AA 4 3 LED BAT iS turned on 11 8 BOOT is flickering c e 11 9 ERR is turned on flickering 11 7 MODE is not turned om 11 3 MODE is flickering s s s 11 4 POWER is turned oft 11 5 RUN is turned off flickering 11 6 USER is turned ON essees 11 8 N MO S 2 caccetieccaetihistescadecte iaiia 4 4 Bu EE 2 6 Link direct device eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteteeees 4 3 M Maximum number of extension stages 2 4 Memory G pacity irnn a ia 4 1 Card E 7 1 N Number of device I O points 4 1 Number of occupied I O points 4 1 Index 1 P POrfOrimane ceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeneteeeteeeteees 4 1 Power supply module External dimensions dagram App 7 Example Of wiring ceeeeeeeseeneeeteeeeees 9 25 INStANAtION AA 9 14 Names of parts and settings eee 5 8 Specifications ninsis aeien iena ai naian 5 1 WIIN EE 9 22 Processing Speed ssssssissrsrsisrerrserernsenenne 4 1 Programming Jonouage 4 1 Q QA1S65B QA1S68B External dimensions A App 9 Names Of parts A 6 6 Dpechkatons eieren eener eeen 6 2 QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC 100B aran naeia ienet iaia 6 3 Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB External dmensionms A App 11 Names Of parn Ecoe A 6 5 Dpechkatons eeen eeen 6 1 Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B External dimensions AA App 9 Names Of parts A 6 4 Dpechkatons 6 1 Q SESS a p eet ee
19. 1600 2 The CPU module battery is not connected Check the supply voltage of the power supply module If the voltage is abnormal then replace the power supply module Check the power supply 1 Change the battery 2 If the battery is for program memory standard RAM or for the back up power function install a lead connector SE Change the battery ooo 1601 stipulated level Change the battery eee ee eee Change tne batery O O 1602 stipulated level Change the battery WO module information power ON is changed WO module or special function module not installed properly or installed on the base unit The High Performance model QCPU of function version A was loaded in a multiple CPU system configuration Read the error common information at the peripheral device and check and or change the module that corresponds to the numerical value module number there Alternatively monitor the special registers SD1400 to SD1431 ata peripheral device and change the fuse at the output module whose bit has a value of 1 Change the High Performance model QCPU of function version A for the High Performance model QCPU of function version B or later x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 22 11 22 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LEDStatus Operating S gege Gei oce Error Messages I
20. 10 15 85V to 132VAC 170 to 264VAC Within 5 refer to section 5 1 3 Rated output current CU Pe Overcurrent 9 9A or more protection 1 Overvoltage 5 5 to 6 5V protection 2 Allowable momentary power failure Within 20ms period 3 Dielectric withstand voltade Across inputs LG and outputs FG S 2830VAC rms 3 cycles 2000 m 6562 ft i Across inputs and outputs LG and FG separated across inputs and LG FG across outputs Insulation resistance g and FG LG 10M9 or more by insulation resistance tester 100 to 120VAC 200 to 240VAC Input power supply e By noise simulator of 1500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise Noise durability frequency e Noise voltage IEC61000 4 4 2kV Operation indication LED indication lit at 5VDC output Built in Unchangeable by user Apbiication ERR contact contact switched off opened normally closed contact at an error stop of CPU pP module for CPU module operating status output Rated switching voltage 24VDC 0 5A current Se Minimum switching load 5VDC 1mA outpu p OFF to ON 10ms max ON to OFF 12ms max section Lif Mechanical More than 2 million times ife Electrical More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage current No Applicable solderless terminal RAV1 25 to 3 5 RAV2 to 3 5 Applicable tightening torque 66 to 89Necm 98mm 3 86inch External 7 55 2mm 2 33inch Ip 115mm 4 53inch 0 40kg dimen
21. After confirmation replace the battery with a new one and reset the CPU module with the RESET L CLR switch or run the LEDR instruction and the BAT LED will turns off 11 8 11 8 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 10 Flowchart for when the BOOT LED is flickering 11 9 MELSEC Q The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the BOOT LED of the CPU module flickers at PLC power on at operation start or during operation BOOT LED flickering Power off the PLC Remove the memory card Move the DIP switches SW2 and SW3 of the CPU module to ON Power on the PLC Is the BOOT LED turned on CPU module hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Completion of automatic write from memory card to standard ROM Perform boot operation from standard ROM 11 9 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 11 Flowchart for when output module LED is not turned on 11 10 The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the output module LED does not turn on during PLC operation Output module LED not turned on NO Flickering Is the MODE LED on Refer to Section 11 2 3 YES Is the LED on when it is monitored on GX Developer NO Reexamine the program YES Check the input output number on the GX Develope
22. BAT LED or memory card Normal Start of boot operation 7 Non execution of boot operation When automatic write to standard ROM is completed normally ERR LED also flickers Module loading lever Used to load the module to the base unit BOOT LED 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q Memory card EJECT button Used to eject the memory card from the CPU module M loadi DEE Connector used to load the memory card to the CPU module connector Connector for connection with USB compatible peripheral device Connector type B 11 USB connector 1 Can be connected by USB dedicated cable Not available for Q02CPU Connector for RS 232 connection 12 RS 232 1 Can be connected by RS 232 connection cable QC30R2 Used to set the items for operation of the CPU module For system protection and parameter valid drive functions refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals SW1 Used to set system protection Batch inhibits write and control directives to the CPU module Shipped in OFF position OFF No protection ON Protection SW2 SW3 Used to specify parameter valid drive Both SW2 and SW3 are shipped in OFF position Program memory Drive 0 Standard ROM Drive 4 Note Parameters cannot be stored in standard RAM Drive 3 RUN STOP switch RUN Executes sequence program operation STOP Stops sequence program operatio
23. Performance Specifications continued Item Lt MEN Remark ww QO02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Qi2HCPU Q25HCPU Link special relay SB 2048 points SBO to 7FF Link special register SW 2048 points SWO to 7FF Step relay S 8192 points SO to 8191 Index register Z 16 points Z0 to 15 Pointer P 4096 points PO to 4095 set parameter values to select usable range ointer of in file pointer shared pointers 256 points l0 to 255 The number of device Int pointer i The specified intervals of the system interrupt pointers 128 to 131 can Get fixed nterrupt pointer 3 PHR be set with parameters 0 5 to 1000ms 0 5 ms unit Default 128 100ms 129 40ms 130 20ms 131 10ms Special relay SM 2048 points SMO to 2047 Special register SD 2048 points SDO to 2047 Function input FX 16 points FXO to F Function output FY 16 points FYO to F Function register FD 5 points FDO to 4 Number of device points Device having a direct access to link device MELSECNET 10 H use only Specified form JOO XOO JOO YOO JOO Woo JOO BOO JOO SwWOo JOO sBooO i Device having a direct access to the buffer memory of the intelligent Intelligent function module device 8 ES function module Specified form UOO GOO LO to 8191 default Latch range can be set for B F V T ST C D and W Set parameter values RUN and PAUSE contacts can be set from among X0 to 1FFF respectively Link direct device Latch
24. debugging error codes and others of MELSAP3 sold separately QCPU Q Mode Programming Manual MELSAP L gege This manual describes the programming methods specifications functions and so on that are 13 JF61 necessary to create the MELSAP L type SFC programs sold separately How to Use This Manual This manual is prepared for users to understand the hardware specifications of those modules such as the CPU modules power supply modules and base units maintenance and inspections of the system and troubleshooting required when you use MELSEC Q series PLCs The manual is classified roughly into three sections as shown below 1 Chapters 1 and 2 Describe the outline of the CPU module and the system configuration The basics of the system configuration of CPU module are described 2 Chapters 3to 7 Describe the general specifications indicating the operating environments of the CPU module power supply module and base units and the performance specifications of these modules 3 Chapters 8 to 10 Describe the overall maintenance such as the installation of the CPU module daily inspections and troubleshooting This manual does not explain the functions of the CPU module For these functions refer to the manual shown below e High Performance model QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations This manual uses the following general names and abb
25. 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Explanation Set by ACPU Applicable p When Sen m9 C CPU S Block 49 _ M1760 Block 49 SM1762 SM1763 SM1764 SM1765 OFF Transmission SM1766 Block 55 SM1767 Transmission trigger uncompleted SM1767 Block 56 OS scan tums on when the S status SM1768 lend flag ON Transmission SM1768 Block 57 corresponding data transmission change New Q4AR aiid has been completed SM1770 SM1770 Block 59 SM1771 SM1771 Block 60 SM1772 SM1772 SM1773 SM1773 Block 62 SM1774 SM1774 SM1775 SM1775 Block 64 11 63 11 63 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 7 Special Register List 11 64 The special registers SD are internal registers with fixed applications in the PLC For this reason it is not possible to use these registers in sequence programs in the same way that normal registers are used However data can be written as needed in order to control the CPU modules and remote I O modules Data stored in the special registers are stored as BIN values if no special designation has been made to the contrary The headings in the table that follows have the following meanings Function of Item Name e Indicates name of special register e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user Sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer
26. B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO i ii i i gt lt k k Vacant CPU key Status of switch Memory cards switch B4 corresponds to card A and B5 S Every corresponds to card B END OFF at 0 ON at 1 processing B8 through B12 correspond to SW1 through SW5 of system setting switch 1 B14 and B15 correspond to SW1 and SW2 of system setting switch 2 respectively OFF at 0 ON at 1 11 71 11 71 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding C din Number Name Meaning Explanation Foe ACPU Kee D TT The following bit patterns are used to store the statuses of the LEDs on the CPU module 0 indicates OFF 1 ON and 2 flicker B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO El RUN BOOT See New BEER ERROR Vacant USER Vacant BAT ALARM Gr MODE Bit patterns for MODE Status of 0 OFF 1 Green D201 LED status CPU LED 2 Orange Information concerning which of the following status the LEDs on the CPU module are in is stored in the following bit patterns Ois off 1 is on and 2 is flicker B15 B12B11 B8 B7 l B4 B3 l er T T T T T T T i L li i i 1 lt 4 ka ka ka ka ka ka ka gt S Status o o o o o EE New QnA BOOT CARD A Memory card CARD B Memory card Vacant Bit pattern of Stores bit patterns of LEDs turned off SD202 LED off LED that is Only USER and BOOT enabled
27. During divided processing turned off at completion of divided processing OFF Batch processing e Turned on when canvas screen transfer to ON Divided processing AD57 S1 AD58 is done by divided processing time ON Read time Shortened The A8UPU A8PUJ cannot be used in the QCPU QnACPU special relays OFF Empty spaces in Communication communication request request registration area registration area ON No empty spaces in SM1070 SM1081 BUSY signal communication request registration area e It is set whether the error checks below are performed or not when the END instruction is processed to set the OFF Error check executed END instruction processing time SE SES ON No error check Check for breakage of fuse e Collation check of I O unit e Check of battery SM1091 Instruction error OFF No error Set when an operation error detail factor is stored at flag ON Error SD1091 and remains set after normal status is restored K e Indication of communication enable disable to remote terminal modules connected to the MELSECNET MINI master A2C or A52G Bau 3 be 3 be d Ed J Ed Ed Ed ES E o Ed a 2 z 3 R After the head address of the required I O module is set to SD251 switching SM251 on allows the I O module to be changed in online mode One module is only allowed to be changed by one setting OFF Replacement To be switched on in the progr
28. SD1101 0 0 o0oj ojojojoj ojoj ojlo SD1107 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 DN Le iis fuse blow e Fuse blow check is executed also to module of remote I O station If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is required to perform clear by user program he ou e Sets value for the step transfer monitoring timer and the number of F which turns on when the monitoring timer timed out b15 to b8b7 to b Timer setting 1 to 255 s in seconds F number setting By turning on any of SM1108 to SM1114 the monitoring timer starts If the transfer condition following a step which corresponds to the timer is not established within set time set annunciator F is tuned on e When I O modules of which data are different from those entered at power on have been detected the UO unit numbers in units of 16 points are entered in bit pattern Preset I O unit numbers when parameter setting has been performed 15 14131211109 8765 4 D1116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D1117 0 0jojojo 0jojojojo D1123 0 0 0 ry o 0jojojojo 100 Te ae UO module verify error e I O module verify check is executed also to remote I O station modules If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is required to perform clear by user program 11 91 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN E MELSEC
29. SM1103 SM323 e of continuous ON Continuous transition transfer conditionis of EE steps are established transition effective ON Consecutive transfer is executed OFF One step per one scan is transferred 11 55 11 55 z z z erg SC E o o ei ei ro 11 TROUBLESHOOTING ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Conversion Modification Continuous SM1104 SM324 transition suspension Step transition sM1108 SM90 Wate ieee iter start equivalent of D9108 Step transition SM1109 SM91 Watchdog m r start equivalent of D9109 Step transition SM1110 SM92 Watchdog timer start equivalent of D9110 Step transition SM1111 SM93 Watchdog timer start equivalent of D9111 Step transition SM1112 SM94 Watchdog timer start equivalent of D9112 Step transition SM11143 ege Watchdog imer start equivalent of D9113 Step transition SM11144 SM9 watchdog timer start equivalent of D9114 Active step sampling trace completion flag Active step SM1181 SM822 sampling trace execution flag Active step SM1182 SM821 sampling trace permission SM1196 SM325 Operation output at block stop M1197 S 2 Switch between blown fuse and VO verification EE error display SM1198 Kee Data recovery of SM1199 online sampling CaN trace status latch 11 56 Relay M9104 M9108 M9109 M9110 M9114 M9196 M9197 M9198 M9199 MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued Meani
30. Switches I O numbers in the fuse blow module storage registers SD1100 to SD1107 and I O module verify error storage registers SD1116 to SD1123 according to the combination of ON OFF of the SM1197 and SM1198 e Recovers the setting data stored in the CPU at restart when sampling trace status latch is executed e SM1199 should be ON to execute again Unnecessary when writing the data again from peripheral devices 11 56 11 TROUBLESHOOTING ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Relay _ Conversion Modification Se D p SM1202 reception for master station ZNWR instruction LWTP instruction SM1203 for ACPU completion for master station ZNRD instruction LRDP instruction for ACPU reception for master station ZNRD instruction LRDP instruction for ACPU completion for master station ZNWR instruction LWTP instruction for ACPU ZNRD instruction LRDP instruction SM1204 SM1205 for ACPU SM1206 reception for local station ZNWR instruction Sets master station B and W SM1208 transmission range for lower link master stations only Link parameter jo fw a M9209 SM1209 for lower link master stations only LWTP instruction for ACPU recep tion for local station Link parameter check results y M9200 M9201 M9202 M9203 M9204 M9205 M9206 M9207 M9208 MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued Meaning OFF Not accepted ON
31. When using the PLC under pressure please contact your sales representative 3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q MEMO 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE 4 1 Performance Specification The table below shows the performance specifications of the CPU module Performance Specifications SE QO02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU SE Control method Repetitive operation of stored program I O control mode Refresh mode direct I O specification DXO DYO Programming language Relay symbol language logic symbolic language MELSAP3 SFC MELSAP L Function block Processing speed Loxo oo79us Ss Sequence instruction MOV DODI o237us Os 360 Total number of instructions eati e cabanas excluding intelligent function module dedicated instructions Fo Constant scan Function for setting the scan timer to fixed 0 5 to 2000 ms configurable in increments of 0 5 ms settings x Program 2 Program memory 28k step 60k step 124k step 252k step capacity Drive 0 Program memory Memory card RAM 2M Drive 1 Capacity of loading memory cards 2Mbyte max Ee Memory card ROM Installed memory card capacity refer to Section 7 1 Drive 2 Flash card 4 Mbyte max ATA card 32 Mbyte max Standard RAM 64kbyte 128kbyte 5 256kbyte 3 Item Set parameter values to specify Drive 3 a ROM 112 kbyte 240 kbyte 496 kbyte 1008 kbyte
32. setting connector Setting of Stage Number for Extension Base Units Number Setting for Extension Stages ist stage 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage 5th stage 6th stage 7th stage D exe oo co oo oo oo GO POINTS To set the stages No setting connector set a number from 1 to 7 according to the number of extension stages Do not set the same stage number at two or more positions or do not fail to seta number A miss input or miss output may occur 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 5 I O Number Allocation The I O numbers are automatically allocated in the system loading status 0 12 3 4 a 8 X Y X Y X Y X Y X Y Salag 0 20 40 60 80 O 53 o U SBIOE g 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ist i B AN LAN LAN LIN XIY XIY XIY LIN Ee AO CO EO 100 120 140 160 180 0 55 stage 38 JE 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ond i a XIYIXIY XIYIXIY XY IXY TX Y LIN extension 2 1A0 1CO 1E0 200 220 240 260 280 O 035 stage dEr 21 22 23 24 25 3rd i a SIN XIY X Y XY X Y extension 8 o 2A0I2CO 2E0 300 320 stage Y 33 ae In this system 32 point modules are loaded on slots 0 to 25 For the I O number setting method us
33. stage 32 33 34 35 36 stage 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 oO 400 480 700 el DN 00 4BF 4DF 4FF 6BF 6DF 6FF 71F 73F 75F 77F OO 0 0 Extension base unit Q65B 2 Extension base unit QA1S65B ath extension Power supply module 7ih extension Power supply module stag d 40 41 42 43 44 stage 61 62 63 ES 500 520 540 560 580 oo 7A0 7C0 7E0 III SAAR de 51F 53F 55F 57F 59F ee 7BF 7DF 7FF ist extension The figure shows the configuration stage Prohibit Prohibit EG hei When module is installed an error occurs Seven Extension Stages 64 modules 4096 1 Extension bases unit of up to seven stages can be used 2 Do not use extension cable longer than an overall extension length of 13 2m 43 31ft 3 When using an extension cable do not bind it together with the main circuit high voltage and heavy current line or do not lay down them closely to each other 4 When setting the No of the expansion stages set it in the ascending order so that the same No is not set simultaneously by two extension base units 5 When Q50B Q6LB and QA1S6LB types of extension base units are mixed first connect the Q50
34. turned off e Turned off at 1 not turned off at 0 The operating status of the remote I O module is stored in the following format B15 B4 B3 lt 4 Vacant Remote VO module operating status Always 2 STOP e The CPU module operating status is stored as indicated in the following figure B15 B12B1 1 B8 B7 l B4 B3 Operating status of 7 CRU STEP RUN STOP S e D9015 format PAUSE change STOP PAUSE cause Switch processing Remote contact Remote operation from the GX Developer or Serial Communication Internal program instruction Note Priority is earliest first Errors Test not yet executed During X Device test S device test i S execution Set when the device test mode is executed on GX Developer Remote hes During Y Request yP device test During X Y device test 11 72 11 72 11 Number LED display priority ranking Priorities 9 to 10 lock Clock data SO rana year month Clock data Clock data E Clock data Clock data minute second Clock data D210 D211 D212 year day of week D213 Clock data Clock data day of week SD207 SD208 SD209 11 73 Priorities 1 to 4 When error is generated the LED display Priorities 5 to 8 higher digits of TROUBLESHOOTING Special Register List Continued Explanation to the error number setting priorities flicker is made accord
35. 150VAC or below 2500 V 300VAC or below 4000 V 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION In order to increase the reliability of the system and exploit the maximum performance of its functions this section describes the methods and precautions for the mounting and installation of the system 9 1 General Safety Requirements DANGER Install a safety circuit external to the PLC that keeps the entire system safe even when there are problems with the external power supply or the PLC module Otherwise trouble could result from erroneous output or erroneous operation 1 Outside the PLC construct mechanical damage preventing interlock circuits such as emergency stop protective circuits positioning upper and lower limits switches and interlocking forward reverse operations 2 When the PLC detects the following problems it will stop calculation and turn off all output in the case of a In the case of b it will stop calculation and hold or turn off all output according to the parameter setting Note that the A1S series module will turn off the output in either of cases a and b All outputs of AnS Series Module will be switched off in the following cases a The power supply module has over current protection equipment and over voltage protection equipment b The PLC CPUs self diagnosis functions such as the watch dog timer error detect problems In addition all output will be turned o
36. 3 into SD1206 If data link returns to D1206 implementing implemented reverse normal status data link in forward loop values stored loopback loopback into SD1205 SD1206 do not return to 0 To return them to 0 therefore sequence program must be used or reset operation performed Corresponding CPU Stores the number of times the loop line has been SD1211 Number of times Stored as cumulative switched to reverse loop or loopback loop selected value Count stops at maximum of FFFFH RESET to return the count to 0 Local station Stores conditions for Stores the local station numbers which are in STOP or D1212 z up to numbers 1 to PAUSE mode operation status 1 6 Device SS number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b6 b5 b4 bi X Stores conditions sp1212 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L7 L6 L5 L2 Local station SD1213 up to numbers 17 D1213 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L23 L22 L21 L18 operation status D1214 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 42 L471 tal ei L38 L37 L34 32 D1215 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L55 L54 L53 L50 Local station Stores conditions for When a local station is switched to STOP or PAUSE SD1214 number i i i i operation status up to numbers 33 to mode the bit corresponding to the station number in 48 the register becomes 1 oi Example When station 7 switches to STOP mode Local station ee bit 6 in SD1212 becomes 1 and when D9215 SD1215 up to numbers 49 to 7 We operatio
37. 7 APPENDIX 2 2 Power supply module A App 7 APPENDIX 2 3 Main base Unit EE App 10 APPENDIX 2 4 Slim type main base unt App 12 APPENDIX 2 5 Extension base Unit arora nions a TA a App 13 APPENDIX 3 Upgraded Functions of High Performance Model OCDE App 16 APPENDIX 3 1 Specification comparison ceccecceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeaecaeeeeeeaesaesaeseeesaeeaeseeseateaeeaeees App 16 APPENDIX 3 2 Function COMPALISON ee eeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenateas App 16 APPENDIX 3 3 Added functions and the corresponding GX Developer versions App 17 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 A 9 A 9 Related manual High Performance model QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals CONTENTS 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features 1 2 Programs 1 3 Convenient Programming Devices and Instructions 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM 2 1 System Configuration 2 2 Precaution on System configuration 2 3 Confirming the Serial Number and Function Version 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS 4 1 Sequence Program 4 1 1 Main routine program 4 1 2 Sub routine programs 4 1 3 Interrupt programs 4 2 Program Execute Type 4 2 1 Initial execution type program 4 2 2 Scan execution type program 4 2 3 Low speed execution type program 4 2 4 Stand by type program 4 2 5 Fixed scan execution type program 4 3 Operation processing 4 3 1 In
38. Accepted OFF Not completed ON End OFF Not accepted ON Accepted OFF Not completed ON End OFF Not completed ON End OFF Not completed ON End OFF Transmits to tier2 and tier 3 ON Transmits to tier2 only OFF Executing the check function ON Check non execution Details e Depends on whether or not the ZNRD word device read instruction has been received e Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNRD instruction e Use the RST instruction to reset e Depends on whether or not the ZNRD word device read instruction execution is complete e Used as a condition contact for resetting SM1202 and SM1203 after the ZNRD instruction is complete e Use the RST instruction to reset Depends on whether or not the ZNWR word device write instruction has been received e Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNWR instruction e Use the RST instruction to reset Depends on whether or not the ZNWR word device write instruction execution is complete e Used as a condition contact to reset SM1202 and SM1203 after the ZNWR instruction is complete e Use the RST instruction to reset On indicates that the ZNRD instruction is complete at the local station On indicates that the ZNWR instruction is complete at the local station Host station link OFF Normal Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of parameter error ON Abnormal the host is valid Depends o
39. Application Connection across the main base unit and extension base unit or across the extension base units 0 15 kg 0 16 kg 0 22 kg 0 40 kg 0 60 kg 1 11 kg When the extension cables are used in combination limit the overall distance of the combined cable to 13 2 m 43 28 ft 6 3 Parts Names of Base Unit The names of the parts of the base unit are described below 1 Main base unit Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Application 1 Extension cable Connector for sending and receiving signals from the extension base unit to which the connector extension cables are connected Protective cover of extension cable connector Before an extension cable is connected 2 Base cover the area of the base cover surrounded by the groove under the word OUT on the base cover must be removed with a tool such as nippers Connector for installing the power supply module CPU module I O modules and intelligent function module To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module QG60 to prevent entry of dirt 4 Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit Screw size M3 x 12 5 Base mounting hole Hole for mo
40. Ferrite core module Cable clamp wee External wiring cable 2 m to 10 m 6 56 ft to 32 79 ft Drive unit 3 Ferrite core and cable clamp types and required quantities e Cable clamp Type AD75CK Mitsubishi Electric e Ferrite core Type ZCAT3035 1330 TDK ferrite core e Required quantity Power supply Cable length Prepared part Required Qty 2 m 6 56 ft to 10m 32 79ft 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q c CC Link module 1 Be sure to ground the cable shield that is connected to the CC Link module close to the exit of control panel or to any of the CC Link stations within 30 cm 11 81 inch from the module or stations The CC Link dedicated cable is a shielded cable As shown in the illustration below remove a portion of the outer covering and ground as large a surface area of the exposed shield part as possible a dedicated cable Shield 2 Always use the specified CC Link dedicated cable 3 Do not use a ferrite core for the CC Link module or CC Link stations 4 The CC Link module the CC Link stations and the FG line inside the control panel should be connected at both the FG terminal and the SLD terminal as shown in the diagram below Simplified diagram Master station Remote I O station Local station Blue T T E Terminal resistor L White K 2 G GG G Terminal resistor ma Yel
41. Front Insert the battery connector into the connector pin on the case Be sure that the insertion direction is correct Connector Completion Bottom Battery 2 The battery for the SRAM card is shipped separately from the battery holder Before installing the SRAM card into the CPU module set the battery holder in the following procedure Model name Set the battery holder s locking switch on m side Battery holder s locking switch to the RELEASE position OC KT Remove the battery holder from the SRAM card RELEASE position Set the battery onto the battery holder with the plus face up Insert the battery holder with which the battery is installed firmly into the SRAM card Confirm that the battery holder s locking switch is set to the LOCK position LOCK position The battery holder s locking switch is set Completion automatically to the LOCK position when the battery holder is removed In its position insert the battery holder firmly 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE For the products sold in European countries the conformance to the EMC Directive which is one of the European Directive has been a legal obligation since 1996 Also conformance to the Low Voltage Directive another European Directive has been a legal obligation since 1
42. L6 154 Ta SD1249 for up to numbers SD1249 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 Local station SD1250 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L4olL39 L38 L37 L36 L35 Corresponding CPU operation S Se D1251 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 tores conditions 7 Lee status The bit corresponding to the station number which is in STOP or PAUSE mode becomes 1 Example When local stations 7 and 15 are in STOP mode bits 6 and 14 of SD1248 become 1 and when SD1248 is monitored its value is 16448 40401 Stores the local station number other than the host which is Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 fin error to 16 Device Bit eae number 515 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bo Stores conditions SD1252 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 SD1253 for up to numbers SD1253 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17 SD1254 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L n L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33 es Stores conditions D1255 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 L50 L49 SD1254 The bit corresponding to the station number which is in error becomes 1 Example When local station 12 is in error bit 11 of SD1252 SD1255 becomes 1 and when SD1252 is monitored its value
43. Lamp or buzzer Voltage relay is RA1 switched ON by recommended SM403 ch Yn A run monitor relay L u Low battery alarm OUTPUT MODULE MC wer ee Lamp or buzzer d GE w Power to output equipment es yall ON when run by MC switched OFF when the A SM403 STOP signal is given Yn In the case of an D RAI 7 emergency stop or a l stop caused by a limit Se EE OUTPUT MODULE MC EMC nterlock circuits as A necessary Provide vz i N Power to output external interlock equipment eer e circuits for conflicting O switched OFF operations such as i when the STOP forward rotation and MC2 signal is given reverse rotation and L o ic J In th EN parts that SC pa EA Slop amage the machine or cause accidents if eae wc l or a stop caused no interlock were used by a limit switch db _ The power ON procedure is as follows For AC For AC DC 1 Switch power ON 1 Switch power ON 2 Set CPU to RUN 2 Set CPU to RUN 3 Turn ON the start switch 3 When DC power is established RA2 goes ON 4 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the output 4 Timer TM times out after the DC power reaches 100 equipment is powered and may be driven by the program The TM set value should be the period of time from when RA2 goes ON to the establishment of 100 DC voltage Set this value to approximately 0 5 seconds 5 Turn ON the start switch 6 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the output equipment is powered and ma
44. Not used 1 absent 0 SFC step designation present 1 absent 0 SD23 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 fo renee Intelligent function number CHK S e module parameter SD24 Parameter number instruction S malfunction for QCPU only number Number Meaning Number Meaning Number Meaning SD16 Parameter No 6 SD16 No SD16 Parameter No 6 SD17 SD17 SD17 Error code for intelligent SD18 SD18 function module SD25 SD19 SD19 SD18 D20 D20 D19 D21 D21 D20 Sp22 Vacant epes Vacant Gen SD23 SD23 SD22 Vacant D24 D24 D23 D25 D25 SD24 D26 D26 D25 SD26 SD26 6 For details of the parameter numbers refer to the user s manual of the CPU module used 11 68 11 68 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding h Set b Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation Poan G ACPU SCH ng DU Error code that e All corresponding bits go ON when battery voltage drops e Subsequently these remain ON even after battery voltage has been returned to normal B4 B3 B2 B1 BO F Bit pattern gt CPU module battery error Battery low __ indicating where __ Memory card A alarm battery voltage drop gt Memory card A error occurred gt Memory card B alarm Memory card B error e When High Performance model QCPU is use
45. OFF No error common information ON Error common information Error common information Error individual information M50 OFF gt ON Error reset e Conducts error reset operation OFF Normal ON Battery y ON Battery OFF AC DC DOWN not detected ON AC DC DOWN detected SM51 Battery low latch AC DC DOWN detection OFF Normal MINI link errors ON Error OFF Normal ration Err 2 Operatiol ors ON Operation error Blown fuse OFF Normal detection OFF Normal ON Error WO module verification error OFF Not detected ON Detected Annunciator detection OFF Not detected CHK detection ON Detected Startup of watchdog timer for step transition Enabled only when SFC program exists OFF Not started ON Started watchdog timer started 11 43 watchdog timer reset e ON if diagnosis results show error occurrence Includes when an annunciator is ON and when an error is detected with CHK instruction Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations restored Comes ON when an error occurs as a result of self diagnosis Does not include when annunciator is ON or when error is detected by CHK instruction Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations restored e When SM0 is ON ON if there is error common information When SM0 is ON ON if there is error individual information e ON if battery voltage at CPU module or memory card drops below ra
46. R4 modules installed x 18 Number of AD75 modules installed x 12 Total gt 1344 The total number of installed AJ71QLP21 AJ71QBR11 e Five or more MELSECNET H modules are loaded in a whole multiple CPU system Five or more Q series Ethernet interface modules are loaded in a whole multiple CPU system 1 5 or more MELSECNET H modules have been installed 2 5 or more Q series Ethernet interface modules have been installed 3 Identical network numbers or station numbers exist in the 2106 MELSECNET 10 network system 3 or more AJ71AP21 R21 amp AJ71AT21B modules are installed AJ71AP21 R21 and AJ71AT21B modules exceeds 5 MELSECNET I or MELSECNET B data link system 1 Network module A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 A1SJ71AP21 A1SJ71AR21 or A1SJ71AT2B dedicated for the A2USCPU has been installed 2 Network module A1SJ71QLP21 or A1SJ71QBR11 dedicated for the Q2AS has been installed A 1s J71LP21 or A 1s J71BR11 for use with the ANUCPU network module has been installed 21096 The control system and standby system module configurations are QnA 2107 Head X Y set in the parameter I O allocation settings is also the Reset the parameter I O allocation setting to conform with the actual Sa head X Y for another module status of the special function modules Rem QnA different when a redundant system is in the backup mode QCPU Rem Reset the parameter MELSECNET MINI auto refresh unit module allocation setting so tha
47. SFC program SD1050 error number exceeded 83 Block start error 84 SFC program operation error Stores the block number in which an error occurred in Block number the SFC program in BIN code D1051 Error block where error In the case of error 83 the starting block number is occurred stored Stores the step number in which error 84 occurred in Sien n rnb rwhere the SFC program in BIN code SD1052 Error step es Secured Stores 0 when errors 80 81 and 82 occurred Stored the block starting step number when error 83 occurred occurred Stored 0 when errors 80 81 82 and 83 occurred Err seauence Sequence step Stores the sequence step number of transfer condition D1054 he number where error and operation output in which error 84 occurred in the t SEP occurred SFC program in BIN code Stores the step number when status latch is executed Stores the step number in a binary value if status latch is executed in a main sequence program Siatus laich Status latch Stores the block number and the step number if status SD1055 execution step execution step No latch is executed in a SFC program No Block No Step No BIN BIN t Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits Stores the software version of the internal system in ASCII code The data in the lower byte F position is indefinite Software version of Higher byte Lower byte The software version is stored D9060 SD1060 Software version t in the higher byte
48. Unit mm inch 2 Main Base Unit Q33SB A T ei 2j S V A ES j Sg L l 7 5 0 30 nm i 85 129 0 3 5 08 0 01 1 74 0 33 142 5 59 A 3 Main Base Unit Q35SB 4 mounting screws M4 x12 3 15 0 01 0 28 Unit mm inch 4 mounting screws M4x 12 ry ab Oo Oo oO oo Oo Oo aed ab he Ki K Gel be be Ze A 5 o sv O ya power E men i I i l j 8 be S L Do 7 5 ig 0 30 S i 8 5 184 5 0 3 1 74 0 33 7 26 0 01 197 5 7 78 d Unit mm inch App 12 App 12 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 2 5 Extension base unit 1 Extension Base Unit Q52B 4 mounting screws M4 x14 WOO 4 31540 01 Unit mm inch 167 0 3 6 57 0 01 189 7 44 Unit mm inch 4 mounting screws M4 x14 o OUT S S NASA sv i HE e i tty OE EF POWER 1700 44 Woh Wohl o Fe Q UD wa 167 0 3 6 57 0 01 0 61 189 7 44 7 5 0 30 44 1 1 74 Unit mm inch App 13 App 13 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 4 Extension Base Unit Q65B
49. Y80 to Y8F in the above system lt Fail safe circuit example gt ON delay timer Internal program Y80 O D SM412 OFF delay timer Ys0 T2 1s External load MC Y81 0 V 24V0 0 5s 0 5s E V d WO avoe f CPU module Output module x2 Ti T2 2 Y80 repeats turning ON and then OFF at 0 5s intervals Use a no contact output module transistor in the example shown above 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 2 Calculating Heat Generation by PLC The ambient temperature inside the board storing the PLC must be suppressed to a PLC usable ambient temperature of 55 C For the design of radiation from the storing board it is necessary to know the average power consumption heating value of the devices and instruments stored in the board Here the method of obtaining the average power consumption of the PLC system is described From the power consumption calculate a rise in ambient temperature inside the board How to calculate average power consumption The power consuming parts of the PLC are roughly classified into six blocks as shown below 1 Power consumption of power supply module The power conversion efficiency of the power supply module is approx 70 i e 30 of the output power is consumed by heating As a result 3 7 of the output power becomes the power consumption Therefore the calculation formula is as follows Wpw ER W I5v Current consumption of logi
50. check the error of the CPU module resulting in CPU module fault and remove the error Reset the High Performance model QCPU and run it again If the same error is displayed again it is a hardware fault of any CPU module Consult your sales representative Remove the High Performance model QCPU of function version A from the main base unit Reset the High Performance model QCPU and run it again If the same error is displayed again it is a hardware fault of any CPU module Consult your sales representative 1 Read the error individual information at a peripheral device and change the faulty station 2 Change the station of function version A for function version B 3 Do not reset the CPU modules of PLC No 2 to 4 Reset the High Performance model QCPU of PLC No 1 and restart the multiple CPU system Read the error individual information at a peripheral device check the error of the CPU module resulting in CPU module fault and remove the error Read the error individual information at a peripheral device and check the program corresponding to the numerical value annunciator number ES the error individual information at a peripheral device and check the program corresponding to the numerical value error number there Set the parameter enable drive to standard ROM switch power on again and perform boot operation from standard ROM Use the software package of the corresponding CPU module to check the details of t
51. either When use the following files is selected for the file registers in the in the internal CPU RAM program memory or on the memory 3002 PLC file setting parameter the specified file does not exist though card Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative the file register capacity has been set The automatic refresh range of the multiple CPU system exceeded Change the file register file for the one refresh enabled in the whole the file register capacity range or later 1 Read the error detailed information at the peripheral device check the parameter items corresponding to the numerical values parameter numbers there and correct when necessary 2 If the error is still generated following the correction of the parameter settings it is likely that there is a memory error either in the internal CPU RAM program memory or on the memory card Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative 3004 The parameter file is incorrect heck whether the parameter file version is x gt gt QPA and Alternatively the contents of the file are not parameters check the file contents to be sure they are parameters 1 Delete the setting of the Q02CPU s high speed interrupt parameter To use high speed interrupts change the CPU 9 module to one of heg GENEE ER GE QCPU g h tiple system delete the setting of the high The high speed parameter is set in a multiple CPU system Se T hich intern han serial 3 The high speed interrupt
52. for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers Stores conditions for up to numbers Corresponding Detail etails CPU Station numbers of local stations that have detected errors are stored into corresponding data register bits as indicated below Device number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 L50 he bit corresponding to SD1216 SD1217 SD1218 SD1219 If a local station detects an error the station number becomes 1 Example When station 6 and 12 detect an error bits 5 and 11 in SD1216 become 1 and when D1216 is monitored its value is 2080 820n Stores the local station numbers that have mismatches between the parameters of the master station of tier three and those of the master station in tier two in the three tier system or the remote I O station numbers that have incorrect I O assignment as shown below in correspondence with the data register bits Device Bit number 515 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bo SD1220 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L
53. s Status Q3A e Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units S Ini Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units S Initial QcPU SD623 B use B use Device comments QCD SFC trace QTS conditions conditions Device initial value QDI Local device QDL File R QDR Not used Sampling trace QTS Not used change Q4A Q4AR Status latch QTL Not used Program trace QTP Not used B7 Fil iste SD640 e Stores drive number being used by file register S Initial D641 Stores file register file name with extension selected at parameters D642 or by use of QDRSET instruction as ASCII code B15 t B8 B7 t BO D643 e aie SD641 Second character First character D644 File register File register SD642 Fourth character Third character D645 SD643 Sixth character Fifth character S Initial New file name file name SD644 Eighth character Seventh character SD645 First character of extension 2EH SD646 i i Second character of SD646 Third character of extension extension e Stores the data capacity of the currently selected file register in 1 k capacity capacity word units change block number block number change drive drive number the QCDSET instruction change 11 81 11 81 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Ee MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU 3 S SD651 Stores the comment file name with extens
54. such as fuse Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply when the PLC main module power is turned on If the external power supply is turned on first it could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation When there are communication problems with the data link refer to the corresponding data link manual for the operating status of each station Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation When connecting a peripheral device to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer or the like to the intelligent function module to exercise control data change on the running PLC configure up an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the whole system will always operate safely Also before exercising other control program change operating status change status control on the running PLC read the manual carefully and fully confirm safety Especially for the above control on the remote PLC from an external device an immediate action may not be taken for PLC trouble due to a data communication fault In addition to configuring up the interlock circuit in the sequence program corrective and other actions to be taken as a system for the occurrence of a data communication fault should be predetermined between the external device and PLC CPU A CAUTION Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each
55. the ferrite will not produce any effect In the CC Link system however ferrite cores cannot be fitted to cables Noise filter power supply line filter A noise filter is a component which has an effect on conducted noise It is not required to fit the noise filter to the power supply line but fitting it can further suppress noise The noise filter has the effect of reducing conducted noise of 10 MHz or less The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below a Do not bundle the wires on the input side and output side of the noise filter When bundled the output side noise will be induced into the input side wires from which the noise was filtered Input side Input side power supply side power supply side Introduction Filter Filter Output side Output side device side aks device side 1 The noise will be included when the 2 Separate and lay the input input and output wires are bundled and output wires b Earth the noise filter earthing terminal to the control cabinet with the shortest wire possible approx 10 cm 3 94 inch Reference Noise Filter FN343 3 01 FN660 6 06 ZHC2203 1 1 Model Name SCHAFFNER SCHAFFNER Rated current Rated voltage 250 V 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 8 2 Requirement to Conform to the Low Voltage Directive The Low Voltage Directive requires each device that operates with the power supply ranging from 5
56. 1 Battery life 1 CPU module battery Q6BAT life a The CPU module battery life is given below Geh Battery life Energization CPU Module i i Time Ratio Guaranteed value Value in actual use Aer SN TIS energized Guaranteed time after MIN TYP alarm occurrence 5433hr 13120hr 120hr 7761hr 18742hr 120hr Q02CPU Type zi 120hr 120hr 120hr 120hr 120hr GE 120ht 120hr 1800hr 6040hr Q12HCPU e Q25HCPU 2520hr 8456hr 4200hr 14093hr 100 x1 The energization time ratio denotes the ratio of power on time in a day 24 hours When power is on for 12 hours and off for 12 hours the energization time ratio is 50 b The Q6BAT life is 10 years when it is used without connecting to the CPU module 2 SRAM card battery life The SRAM card battery life changes depending on the combination of the serial number first 5 digits of the CPU module and the manufacturing control number of the memory card The SRAM card battery life is indicated below a CPU module whose serial number s first 5 digits are 04012 or later Energization Battery life SRAM card Time Ratio Guaranteed value Value in actual use After SM51 is energized x Guaranteed time after K1 MIN TYP alarm occurrence Q2MEM 1MBS Manufacturing 0 690hr 6336hr 8hr control number 100 eeh 13872hr control number DOP x2 200 Sne neen ap Q2MEM 2MBS 100 10 5 10 5 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 10 6 MELSEC
57. 3 ROM Main program E PROM Subprogram 1 E PROM Subprogram 2 E PROM Subprogram 3 E PROM D9016 SD1016 Program number D9017 SD1017 SD520 Scan time Minim rn sca time 10 ms units Corresponding CPU When operation error has occurred during execution of application instruction the step number at which the error has occurred is stored in BIN code Since storage into SD1011 is made when SM1011 changes from off to on the contents of SD1011 cannot be renewed unless SM1011 is cleared by user program The I O control mode set is returned in any of the following numbers 0 Both input and output in direct mode 1 Input in refresh mode output in direct mode 3 Both input and output in refresh mode The operation status of CPU as shown below are stored in SD203 B15 to B12B11 to B8B7 to B4 B3 to BO e _ foe Remote RUN STOP by computer Po am CPU key switch CT as Remains the same in remote RUN STOP mode Remote RUN STOP by parameter setting Status in program CG aw STOP o Except below 1 PAUSE ai x 1 When the CPU module is in RUN mode and instruction execution SM1040 is off the CPU remains in RUN mode if changed to PAUSE mode e Indicates which sequence program is run presently One value of 0 to B is stored in BIN code If scan time is smaller than the content of SD520 the value is newly stored at each END Namely the minimum v
58. 41 Unit mm inch 8 Extension Base Unit QA1S68B 4 mounting screws M5 x25 ebe hl oF Al RP OA OW II II II a ul ul Ul ul Ui y D E ron rog roa rog rog e e 16 4 S CH 10 65 51 2 Ss 72 02 10 400 0 3 15 76 0 01 I 0 39 420 16 55 Unit mm inch App 15 App 15 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 3 Upgraded Functions of High Performance Model QCPU The High Performance model QCPU is upgraded to add functions and change the specifications The functions and specifications that can be used by the High Performance model QCPU change depending on the function version serial number APPENDIX 3 1 Specification comparison Serial No of CPU Module Function Version A Function Version B Specifications 02091 02092 03051 04012 R or earlier or later or later or later Q02CPU 32kbyte Q02HCPU 32kbyte 64kbyte Standard RAM capacity QO6HCPU 32kbyte 64kbyte CPUsharedmemory x x OU Ol CT OT Extended ife battery SRAMcard x x x x o Compatibility with 2MbytesRAMcard x x x x o Q Sere x N A APPENDIX 3 2 Function comparison Serial No of CPU Module Function Version A Function Version B Added Function 02091 02092 03051 04012 EE KM earlier oe later or later or later A
59. 6 2 Automatic write to standard ROM Auto Down load all data from Memory card to standard ROM 6 7 Executing Standard ROM Memory Card Programs Boot Run 6 8 Program File Configuration 6 9 GX Developer File Operation and File Handling Precautions 6 9 1 File operation 6 9 2 File handling precautions 6 9 3 File size 7 FUNCTION 7 1 Function List 7 2 Constant Scan 7 3 Latch Functions 7 4 Setting the Output Y Status when Changing from to STOP Status to from RUN Status 7 5 Clock Function 7 6 Remote Operation 7 6 1 Remote RUN STOP 7 6 2 Remote PAUSE 7 6 3 Remote RESET 7 6 4 Remote latch clear 7 6 5 Relationship of the remote operation and High Performance model QCPU RUN STOP switch 7 7 Changing the Input Response Speed of the Q Series Compatible Module I O Response Time 7 7 1 Selecting the response time of the input module 7 7 2 Selecting the response time of the high speed input module 7 7 3 Selecting the response time of the interrupt module 7 8 Setting the Switches of the Intelligent Function Module 7 9 Monitoring Function 7 9 1 Monitor condition setting 7 9 2 Monitoring test for local device 7 9 3 Forced ON OFF of external I O 7 10 Writing in Program during High Performance model QCPU RUN 7 10 1 Writing data in the circuit mode during the RUN status 7 10 2 Writing a batch of files during RUN 7 11 Execution Time Measurement 7 11 1 Program monitor list 7 11 2 Interrupt program monitor list 7 11 3 Scan time measurement 7 12 Sampling
60. 75VDC 0 15VDC When the Q50B is connected to Extension stage 2 Extension Cable Extension Cable Main base unit Q30B Type Conductor Power Resistance Q supply module QC05B QC06B QC12B Extension stage 1 QC30B QC50B QC100B Extension base unit Q60B Extension base unit OSCH Extension stage 2 Symbol V Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit Q501B 5VDC current consumption when the Q5DB is used as Extension n 1 n 1 to 6 n Extension No of Q60B connected Sum total of current consumed by OST and currents consumed by the I O intelligent function modules loaded on the Q50B Extension cable resistance between the main base unit or the extension base unit Q60B and the extension base unit Q60B Extension cable resistance between the extension base unit Q60B and extension base unit OST 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q List for Calculating Voltage Drops Occurring at Extension Cables when connecting Q6LB between Q30B and Q50B Position of extension base unit Voltage drop caused by extension cable from the main base unit to the Q6UB Qs501B Q5DB IN connector V Extension stage 1 Extension stage 2 V R1 Re2 I1 Extension stage 1 Extension stage 2 The voltage supplied to the IN connector of the Q501B reaches 4 75 VDC or higher on the condition that the voltage drop V at the
61. 99 Se sS D9132 detection spe3 0 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 Number Ot Instruction annunciator annunciat 5D72 Jurte number spe4 o 50 50 50 50 50 5050 5050 50 J008 execution New SD65 0 O 25 25 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 15 SD73 spe o o 0 99 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 New SD67 0 0 01 0 0 0 70 70 70 70 70 70 65 SD74 Spee 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 65 65 65 65 38 New SD69 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 38 38 38 38 110 SD70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 110 110 110 151 SD75 SD71 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 151 210 New Number sD72 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 210 0 detected SD76 sDoz3 o o o olololololololololo New SD74 0 0 0 0 0 o0o loj olo 0 00 0 SD77 sp75 0 o0 o0 o0 o0 o0 o o0j o ojojfoj o New O SD76 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dip 0 SD78 SD7 0 0 O ET E0 ga 0 0 00 0 New SD78 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 SD79 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0j 0 0 00 0 SD79 New S Error codes detected by the CHK instruction are stored as BCD SD80 CHK number CHK number ode y MERES Instruction New execution SD90 Corresponds to SM90 F numbers which go ON at step transition D9108 watchdog timer set value and watchdog timer SD91 Corresponds to SM91 over errors D9109 SD92 2 Corresponds to SM92 B15 B8 B7 BO D9110 Step transition SD93 watchdog Corresponds to SM93 D9111 timer setting F number for 7 f i AA SD94 i Corresponds to SM94 F number setting Timer time limit D9112 value timer set
62. ASCII code B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD806 Second character First character SD807 Fourth character Third character SD808 Sixth character Fifth character SD809 Eighth character seventh character First character of SD810 4 extension 2EH Third character of SD811 S extension 2nd character of extension Corresponding ACPU DT Corresponding CPU S During execution S During execution e Stores step number from point in time when status latch was conducted SD812 Patterm SD813 SD814 SD815 SD816 Contents of pattern data 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number Din to 0 0 Status latch S During execution D9055 format change E SFC block designation present 1 absent 0 SFC block designation present 1 absent 0 Not in use SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 11 84 11 84 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Special Register List 8 Latch area Meaning Drive where power was interrupted accessed during power loss B15 to Explanation e Stores drive number if file was being accessed during power loss e Stores file name with extension in ASCII code if file was being B8 B7 to BO SD901 2nd character 1st character SD902 4th character File name Access file 3rd character SD903 6th character active during name during 5th character SD904 8th ch
63. CC Link error status 4th module The above module numbers n are in order of the head I O Nos However the modules without parameter setting are not counted in 1 When Xn0 of the installed CC Link goes ON the bit corresponding to the station switches ON When either Xn1 or XnF of the installed CC Link switch OFF the bit corresponding to the station switches ON Switches ON when the CPU module cannot communicate with the installed CC Link B15 to B9 B8 to BO 8th 1st 8th 1st module module module module lt gt lt gt Information of Information of Q D290 points Stores the number of points currently set for X devices located for X umber of located for Y umber of located for M joints e Stores the number of points currently set for L devices located for L umber of joints e Stores the number of points currently set for B devices O Rem located for B umber of D295 Device joints Stores the number of points currently set for F devices WER located for F allocation Same as umber of S Initial New parameter d s edfor Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices O Rem B umber of e Stores the number of points currently set for V devices located for V umber of ints e Stores the number of points currently set for S devices located for S umber of joints e Stores the number of points currently set for T device located for T umber of die edfor l Stores the
64. Consult the nearest service center agent or our branch office and describe the symptom Read error individual information then check and edit the special function module Network module dedicated instruction that corresponds to the numerical value there program error location QCPU function Ver B or later Read the individual information of the error check the program corresponding that value program error location and make correction 2120 The location of QUB and QA1SLB is improper heck the location of the base unit The CPU module is installed at other than the CPU slot or slots 0 to heck the loading position of the CPU module and reinstall it at the 2121 2 correct slot 2122 QA1SLB is used to the main base unit Use Q3_IB as the main base unit 1 A module is installed at 65th or higher slot 2 A module is installed at the slot later than the number of slots specified with base allocation setting 3 A module is installed at the I O points later than the 4 096th point 4 A module installed at the 4 096th point occupies higher points 1 A module which the QCPU cannot recognise has been installed 2 There was no response form the intelligent function module PU modu following 1 There are empty slots between the QCPU and QCPU motion controller 2 Modules other than the QCPU including the motion controller modules are loaded between the QCPU modules 2125
65. Contact your nearest Mitsubishi Rem CH CH 1006 representative 1007 1008 QCPU 1009 Failure of the power supply module CPU module main base unit extension base unit or extension cable is detected 1 Entire program was executed without the execution of an END 1 M i i easure noise level 1011 instruction 2 Reset and establish the RUN status again 1 Ilene a ae eee itis read as another If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU O 1012 2 The END instruction has been changed to another instruction eee error Contact your nearest Mitsubishi code somehow 1101 Error in internal RAM program memory where CPU module sequence program is stored This suggests a CPU module hardware error Contact your nearest Error in RAM used as CPU module work area ta biai Internal CPU module device error Mitsubishi representative RAM Address error in CPU module 1 Measure noise level QCPU 2 Reset and establish the RUN status again function CPU shared memory fault If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU Ver B module hardware error Contact your nearest Mitsubishi or later representative The circuit that performs CPU internal index modification is not 1200 operating proper y This suggests a CPU module hardware error Contact your nearest 1201 Internal CPU module hardware logic does not operate normally Mitsubishi representative 1202 The circuit that executes sequence processing i
66. H Q61P A1 uo O Q sl Lee A of ERR x1 O 100VAC Di ro ie ee tn copocopoo JO 100 120VAC Guid wire C O SL Grounding POINTS 1 Use the thickest possible max 2 mm 14 AWG wires for the 100 200 VAC and 24 VDC power cables Be sure to twist these wires starting at the connection terminals To prevent a short circuit should any screws loosen use solderless terminals with insulation sleeves 2 When the LG terminals and FG terminals are connected be sure to ground the wires Do not connect the LG terminals and FG terminals to anything other than ground If LG terminals and FG terminals are connected without grounding the wires the PLC may be susceptible to noise In addition since the LG terminals have potential the operator may receive an electric shock when touching metal parts 3 1 An error cannot be output from the ERR terminal of the power supply module loaded on the extension base To output an error use the ERR terminal of the power supply module loaded on the main base unit 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 10 1 lt DANGER N CAUTION Do not touch the terminals while power is on Doing so could cause shock Correctly connect the battery Also do not charge disassemble heat place in fire short circuit or solder the battery Mishandling of a battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in injury and fires Turn th
67. INPUT TPUT INPUT OUTPUT 100 240VAC 5VDC 5A 100 240VAC C 3A DC15 6 31 2V DC 5V 5A 24VDC 0 6A 50 60Hz 50 60Hz E F p C ele Dua Dua es lei ei zllel ele TINPUT INPUT Si vleit ei ele ole _ 100 240VAC te _ 100 240VAC A1S61PN A1S62PN D I A1S62PN Application 5VDC power indicator LED Used to supply 24VDC power to inside the output module using external wiring Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board 4 LG terminals Grounding for the power supply filter The potential of A1S61PN or A1S62PN terminal is 1 2 of the input voltage Power input terminals Used to connect a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply Power input terminals Used to connect a 24 VDC power supply 7 Terminal screw M3 5 X 7 screw GE Protective cover of the terminal block Module fixing screw Used to fix the module to the base unit 9 M4 screw tightening torque 66 to 89Necm POINTS 1 Do not wire to those terminals for which NC is stamped on the terminal block 2 Ensure that the earth terminals LG and FG are grounded 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE T
68. L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L34 SD1242 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L50 e If a local station goes down during the operation the contents before going down are retained Contents of SD1224 to SD1227 and SD1228 to SD1231 are ORed If the corresponding bit is 0 the corresponding bit of the special register above becomes valid e If the own master station goes down the contents before going down are also retained Allows a local station to confirm its own station number Number of link Stores number of D9244 SD1244 Indicates the number of slave stations in one loop device stations slave stations Number of times D9245 SD1245 communications errors detected 11 96 Stores cumulative total of receive errors Stores the number of times the following transmission errors have been detected CRC OVER AB IF Count is made to a maximum of FFFFr RESET to return the count to 0 11 96 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Details Conversion Conversion Modification Stores conditions Stores the local station number which is in STOP or PAUSE D9248 SD1248 for up to numbers 1 mode to 16 Device Bit number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 Stores conditions p1248 L16 L15 L14 Lia Li2 iia Lto L9 L8 17
69. Oeae LI k Overvoltage 5 5 to 6 5V protection 2 Allowable momentary power failure via Within 10ms Dette wilhictaadvollade Across inputs LG and outputs FG 500VAC across 9 2830VAC rms 3 cycles 2000 m 6562 ft primary and 5VDC Across inputs and outputs LG and FG separated across inputs and 10MQ or more by Insulation resistance LG FG across outputs and FG LG 10MQ or more by insulation insulation resistance resistance tester tester By noise simulator of e By noise simulator of 1500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 500Vp p noise voltage Noise durability to 60Hz noise frequency 1 us noise width and e Noise voltage IEC61000 4 4 2kV 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Operation indication LED indication lit at 5VDC output Built in Unchangeable by user Application ERR contact contact switched off opened normally closed contact at an error stop of CPU pP module for CPU module operating status output Rated switching voltage 24VDC 0 5A current SN Minimum switching load 5VDC 1mA OFF to ON 10ms max ON to OFF 12ms max Life Mechanical More than 2 million times Electrical More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage current Esch diriensiong D OBS o O 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q Power Supply Module Specifications Continued Performance Specifications l Item Q64P Base loading position Power supply module loading slot Applicable base unit Q30B Q60B
70. Operating DE Green Error Messages Information Information LED Status Statuses of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 1 RUN J ERROR CPU 1000 Flicker On Stop J When an END instruction is executed F At power ON At reset At power ON At reset Flicker When END instruction executed When instruction executed Stop AE 1300 FUSE BREAK OFF Unit moule No Of ON Flicker On Continue When an END instruction is 2 x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being eve x 2 The CPU MODULE operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 1002 1003 1004 1005 MAIN CPU DOWN 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 END NOT EXECUTE 1012 1101 T102 1103 1104 eau ERROR 1105 1200 1201 1202 1203 OPE CIRCUIT ERR 1204 1205 1206 1000 1001 LJ 1003 ra LJ 1007 re 1010 _ poe 1102 1103 _ EI BE DE e 11 19 11 19 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC O Error Code f Corres Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action ponding SD0 x 1 CPU 1000 Bom 1001 1002 QCPU 1003 Run mode suspended or failure of main CPU module 1 Measure noise level 1004 1 Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason 2 Reset and establish the RUN status again 1005 2 Hardware fault If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU module hardware error
71. PC RAS setting parameter 2 Review the constant scan time and low speed program 2 The low speed program execution time specified in the PC RAS execution time in the parameter so that the margin time of setting parameter exceeded the margin time of constant scan constant scan may be fully reserved Read the error individual information at a peripheral device check Low speed scan type program scan time goes over the low speed b Driek execution WDT set in the parameter PC RAS settings pe nu e nanoa value time there and shorten scan time if 6000 The control system and standby system in the redundant system do Synchronise the programs and parameters of the control system not have the same programs and parameters and standby system 6010 The operational status of the control system and standby system in the redundant system is not the same standby system x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored Read the common error information at a peripheral device check LG 11 34 11 34 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code Common Individual Operating SDO a Error Messages Information E LED Status Statuses of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 CPU 6100 At power on TRK MEMORY Continue Reset STOP RUN ERR x3 em nen END instruction executed END instruction executed ial RS Always MULT CPU DOWN Unit module No Off Flicker St
72. PLC system is the one on the slot on the right of the rightmost CPU module Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has SD10 Error Error been stored EE beat PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 information information If a fuse blown or I O verify error occurred in the module loaded in the MELSECNET H remote I O station the network number is stored into the upper 8 bits and the station number into the lower 8 bits Use the I O No to check the module where the fuse blown or I O verify error occurred File name Drive name Example Number Meaning ABCDEFGH IJK SD5 Drive B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD6 42H B 41H A SD7 File name 444 D 43H C SD8 ASCII code 8 characters 46H F 45H E SD9 48H H SD10 Extensionx3 2EH 49H 1 2EH SD11 ASCII code 3 characters 4BH K 4AH J SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 Continued to next page 47H G Vacant x3 Extensions are shown below Higher8 bits Lowers bits Higher bits yP po STH THT 2 LC 0 Device initial value po STH an n QDR Fileregister 11 66 11 66 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Set by Corresponding Explanation Continued SD5 Time value set Number Meaning SD5 Time 1 us units 0 to 999 us SD6 Time 1 ms units 0 to 65535 ms
73. Q b CPU module whose serial number s first 5 digits are 04011 or earlier Energization Battery life f After SM51 is energized SRAM card Time ge Guaranteed value Value in actual use S Guaranteed time after alarm occurrence MIN TYP Q2MEM 1MBS Manufacturing 0 690hr 6336hr control number 100 11784hr 13872hr 1 The energization time ratio denotes the ratio of power on time in a day 24 hours When power is on for 12 hours and off for 12 hours the energization time ratio is 50 2 The manufacturing control number is given on the SRAM card rear label see below SES SS SIS Fok eee oie CAUTION 1 BOVI YJEF BOTE Do not subject to mechanical shock Bim BSA Kirt oenence Do not expose to extreme temperrature Manufacturing control number POINT Remember that the SRAM card consumes battery power even when the battery is connected to the CPU module and the power is turned ON If the special relay SM51 battery low latch turns on immediately replace the battery If an alarm has not yet occurred it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the conditions of use 10 6 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 3 2 Battery replacement procedure 1 CPU module battery replacement procedure When the CPU module battery has been exhausted replace the battery with a new one according to the procedure shown below The PLC power must be on for 10 minutes or
74. Q mode ON orange A mode Flicker green Enforced ON OFF for external I O registered Indicates the operating status of the CPU module ON During operation in RUN status OFF During a stop in STOP status or detection of error whose occurrence stops operation Flicker When parameter program is written at STOP and RUN STOP switch is changed from STOP to RUN To turn ON the RUN LED after writing the program carry out the following steps e Set the RUN STOP switch from RUN gt STOP RUN e Reset with the RESET L CLR switch e Restart the PLC power To turn ON the RUN LED after writing the parameters carry out the following steps e Reset with the RESET L CLR switch e Restart the PLC power If the RUN STOP switch is set from RUN gt STOP gt RUN after changing the parameters the parameters related to the intelligent function module such as the network parameters will not be reflected LED Detection of self diagnosis error which will not stop operation except battery error When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter 4 ERR LED Normal Detection of error whose occurrence stops operation When automatic write to standard ROM is completed normally BOOT LED also flickers Error detected by CHK instruction or annunciator ON 5 USER LED Normal Execution of latch clear Occurrence of battery error due to reduction in battery voltages of CPU module 6
75. Q2MEM 4MBF types Flash card General name for Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA and Q2MEM 32MBA types ATA ATA card caid General name for SRAM card Flash card and ATA card Slim type power supply module General name for Q61SP slim type power supply module Battery General name for battery for Q6BAT type CPU module and Q2MEM BAT type SRAM card General name for Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P Q64P A1S61PN A1S62P and Powersupply module A1S68P types power supply module SE name for QCO5B QCO06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B type extension 1 OVERVIEW 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q This Manual describes the hardware specifications and handling methods of the High Performance model QCPU The Manual also describes those items related to the specifications of the power supply module main base unit extension base unit extension cable memory card and battery Functions are added when the High Performance model QCPU is updated The added functions can be discriminated by the function version serial number of the CPU module Table 1 1 gives the added functions and the corresponding GX Developer versions When using the added function confirm the function version serial number and the GX Developer version Table 1 1 List of Functions Added to High Performance Model QCPU and Function Versions Serial Numbers Update Details of High Performance Model QCPU Corresponding Function Serial No Added functions GX Developer version e Automatic wri
76. Q3OSB is used MITSUBISHI HELSEG Memory card 1 Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA High Performance model QCPU 5 Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU ee Q12HCPU Q25HCPU O Slim type main base unit Slim type power supply module 3 Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB 2 HO modules Intelligent function module POINTS 1 The number of memory cards to be installed is one sheet The memory card must be selected from SRAM card Flash card and ATA card according to the application and capacity With commercial memory cards the Operation is not assured x2 The slim type main base unit does not have an extension cable connector The extension base unit and GOT cannot be connected x3 Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P or Q64P cannot be used for the power supply module Use Q61SP for the power supply module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM 2 Configuration of peripheral devices et Memory card 1 Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA High Performance model QCPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU G RS 232 cable QC30R2 Personal Computer GX Developer Version 4 or later SW4D5C GPPW E or later PC
77. S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt Set by When set Indicated only for registers set by system Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error occurs Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc Indicates corresponding special register in ACPU D9 _ _ __ Change and notation when Corresponding ACPU there has been a change in contents bd III e Items indicated as New have been newly added for High Performance model QCPU QnACPU e Indicates the corresponding CPU module type name Rem Can be applied to all CPU module types and MELSECNET H remote I O modules Can be applied to all types of CPU module QCPU Can be applied to High Performance model QCPU QnA Can be applied to QnA series and Q2ASCPU series Remote Can be applied to the MELSECNET H remote I O modules Each CPU type name Can be applied only to the specific CPU module e g Q4ARCPU Q3ACPU For details on the following items refer to the following manuals e Networks e For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network e For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network e For QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network
78. S3 master module control Read the common error information at a peripheral device check E instruction was wrong error step corresponding to its numerical value program error QnA The designation of an AD57 AD58 control instruction was wrong location and correct the problem No SFCP or SFCPEND instruction in SFC program Read common error information at a peripheral device check error range step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem Read common error information at a peripheral device check error 4422 Step number designations overlap in SFC program step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem are not equal instructions in the SFC program is incorrect Read common error information at a peripheral device check error 4502 There was no STEPI instruction in SFC program block step corresponding to its numerical value program error location 4503 The step designated by the TSET instruction in the SFC program and correct the problem does not exist 4504 The step designated by the TAND instruction in the SFC program does not exist The SFC program contains data that cannot be processed Read common error information at a peripheral device check error 4601 Exceeds device range that can be designated by the SFC program step corresponding to its numerical value program error location 4602 he START instruction in an SFC program i
79. SD For the error code 4000H to 4FFFH developed upon a request for general data processing from the GX Developer intelligent function module or network system refer to Appendix 1 11 3 1 Procedure for reading error codes When an error occurs the error code and error message can be read by the GX Developer Version 4 or later The procedure for reading error codes by the GX Developer is as follows 1 Start the GX Developer 2 Connect the CPU module to the personal computer 3 Select Online Read from PLC Menu by the GX Developer and also read the project from the High Performance model QCPU 4 Select the Diagnostics Diagnostics PLC Menu 5 Click the Error Jump button in the PLC diagnostics dialog box to display the error code and error message 6 Select the Help PLC error Menu and confirm the content of the applicable error code For details of the GX Developer operating method refer to the applicable the GX Developer Operating Manual 11 18 11 18 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 2 Error Code List The following information deals with error codes and the meanings causes and corrective measures of error messages in the Corresponding CPU column indicates that the error is applied to all types of CPU modules Rem indicates compatibility with the remote I O module A CPU type name in the column indicates that the error is applied only to the specific CPU module type Common Individual
80. System Reference Manual e SFC QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC 1 SD1200 to SD1255 are used for QnACPU These relays are vacant with QCPU 2 Special register SD1500 and later are dedicated for Q4ARCPU 11 64 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List 1 Diagnostic Information oe Diagnostic Diagnosis errors error code Corresponding Corresponding ACPU DCL CPU Error codes for errors found by diagnosis are stored as BIN data e Contents identical to latest fault history information Year last two digits and month that SDO data was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit code B15 B8 B7 to BO Year 0 to 99 Month 1 to 12 Example October 1995 H9510 The day and hour that SDO was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit to Clock time for Clock time for 1 A R diagnosis diagnosis error error occurrence occurrence code B15 to B8 B7 0 o Example Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 10 a m on 25th H2510 e The minute and second that SDO data was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit code o Example 35 min 48 sec past the hour H3548 Category codes which help indicate what type of information is being stored in the common information areas SD5 through SD15 and the individual information areas SD16 through SD26 are stored here B15 to B8 B7 to BO Individual information category codes B15 B8 B7 Minutes 0 to 59
81. TM set value should be the period of time from when RA2 goes ON to the establishment of 100 DC voltage Set this value to approximately 0 5s 5 Turn ON the start switch 6 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the output equipment is powered and may be driven by the program If a voltage relay is used at RA2 no timer TM is required in the program 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 3 Fail safe measures against failure of the PLC Power supply Failure of a CPU module or memory can be detected by the self diagnosis function However failure of I O control area may not be detected by the CPU module In such cases all I O points turn ON or OFF depending on a condition of problem and normal operating conditions and operating safety cannot sometimes be maintained Though Mitsubishi PLCs are manufactured under strict quality control they may cause failure or abnormal operations due to unspecific reasons To prevent the abnormal operation of the whole system machine breakdown and accidents fail safe circuitry against failure of the PLC must be constructed outside the PLC Examples of a system and its fail safe circuitry are described below lt System example gt CPU module Input 16 points Input 16 points Input 16 points Input 16 points Power supply Y80 to Y8F i module for fail safe purpose 1 1 The output module for fail safe purpose should be loaded in the last slot of the system
82. The number of points of up to 517120 points can be used by block conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 e When a SRAM card 2Mbyte is used The number of points of up to 1041408 points can be used by block conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 e When a Flash card 2Mbyte is used When a Flash card is The number of points of up to 1041408 points can be used by block used read only is conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 File register When a Flash card 4Mbyte is used possible The number of points of up to 1042432 points can be used by block The ATA card cannot conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 GEN e When a standard RAM is used 32768 points ZRO to 32767 65536 points ZRO to 65535 No block conversion necessary Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 131072 points ZRO to 131071 No block conversion necessary e When a SRAM card 1Mbyte is used ZR 517120 points ZRO to 517119 No block conversion necessary e When a SRAM card 2Mbyte is used 1041408 points ZRO to 1041407 No block conversion necessary e When a Flash card 2Mbyte is used 1041408 points ZRO to 1041407 No block conversion necessary e When a Flash card 4Mbyte is used 1042432 points ZRO to 1042431 No block conversion necessary Number of use points Ka 2 CO CO o 2 gt oO ze 2 O oO Q E Z 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q
83. Trace Function 7 13 Debug Function with Multiple Users 7 13 1 Multiple user monitoring function 7 13 2 Multiple user RUN write function 7 14 Watch dog timer WDT 7 15 Self Diagnosis Function 7 15 1 Interrupt due to error occurrence 7 15 2 LED display when error occurs 7 15 3 Cancel error 7 16 Failure History 7 17 System Protect 7 17 1 Password registration 7 17 2 Remote password 7 18 Monitoring High Performance model QCPU System Status from GX Developer System Monitor 7 19 LED Display 7 19 1 LED display 7 19 2 Priority setting 7 20 High Speed Interrupt Function 7 21 Module Service Interval Time Reading 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE 8 1 Communication Between High Performance model QCPU and Q series Intelligent Function Modules 8 1 1 Initial setting and automatic refresh setting using GX Configurator 8 1 2 Communication using device initial value 8 1 3 Communication using FROM TO instruction 8 1 4 Communication using the intelligent function module device 8 1 5 Communication using the instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules 8 2 Request from Intelligent Function Module to High Performance model QCPU 8 2 1 Interrupt from the intelligent function module 8 3 Communication Between High Performance model QCPU and AnS Series Special Function Modules 8 3 1 Communication using device initial value 8 3 2 Communication using FROM TO instruction 8 3 3 Communication using the intelligent functi
84. W From this overall power consumption W calculate the heating value and a rise in ambient temperature inside the board The outline of the calculation formula for a rise in ambient temperature inside the board is shown below W OJ T W Power consumption of overall sequencer system value obtained above A Surface area inside the board U When the ambient temperature inside the board is uniformed by a fan 6 When air inside the board is not circulated ccceeseeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeees 4 When a rise in ambient temperature inside the board exceeds the specified limit it is recommended that you install a heat exchanger in the board to lower the ambient temperature inside the board If a normal ventilating fan is used dust will be sucked into the PLC together with the external air and it may affect the performance of the PLC 7 Example of calculation of average power consumption a System configuration Q35B Q61P A1 QO02HCPU Qx40 QX40 QY10 QJ71LP21 25 Vacant b 5 VDC current consumption of each module QO2HCPU 0 64 A QX40 0 05 A QY10 0 43 A QJ71LP21 25 0 55 A Q35B 0 074 A c Power consumption of power supply module WPw 3 7 x 0 64 0 05 0 05 0 43 0 55 0 074 x5 3 84 W d Power consumption of a total of 5 VDC logic section of each module W5v 0 64 0 05 0 05 0 43 0 55 0 074 x5 8 97 W e A total of 24 VDC average power consumption of the outpu
85. avtsev spb ru CONSYS Promyshlennaya St 42 RU 198099 St Petersburg Phone 7 812 325 36 53 Fax 7 812 325 36 53 e mail consys consys spb ru ELEKTROSTYLE UI Garschina 11 RU 140070 Moscowskaja Oblast Phone 7 095 261 3808 Fax 7 095 261 3808 e mail ICOS RUSSIA Industrial Computer Systems Zao Ryazanskij Prospekt 8a Office 100 RU 109428 Moscow Phone 7 095 232 0207 Fax 7 095 232 0327 e mail mail icos ru NPP Uralelektra Sverdlova 11a RU 620027 Ekaterinburg Phone 7 34 32 53 27 45 Fax 7 34 32 53 27 45 e mail elektra etel ru STC Drive Technique Poslannikov Per 9 str 1 RU 107005 Moscow Phone 7 095 786 21 00 Fax 7 095 786 21 01 e mail info privod ru RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA Aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC NDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 2102 486 0 Hotline 49 1805 000 765 Fax 49 2102 486 7170 www mitsubishi automation de megfa mail meg mee com www mitsubishi automation com
86. be generated due to the accumulated dust An environment for a typical factory floor Pollution level 4 Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain snow etc An outdoor environment As shown above the PLC can realize the pollution level 2 when stored in a control box equivalent to IP54 8 10 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 8 2 5 Grounding MELSEC Q There are the following two different grounding terminals Use either grounding terminal in an earthed status 8 2 6 External wiring 1 Protective grounding Maintains the safety of the PLC and improves the noise resistance Functional grounding L Improves the noise resistance 24VDC external power supply For the MELSEC Q series PLC 24VDC I O modules and the intelligent function modules special function modules which require external supply power use a model whose 24VDC circuit is intensively insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit External devices When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the PLC use a model whose circuit section of the interface to the PLC is intensively insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit Intensive insulation Intensive insulation refers to the insulation with the dielectric withstand voltage shown in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Intensive Insulation Withstand Voltage Installation Category II source IEC664 Rated voltage of hazardous voltage area Surge withstand voltage 1 2 50 us
87. blown fuse and erg me hse aine SE corresponding to the j numerical value module No reading 2 External Poa supply for output load is turned off or Alternatively monitor special registers SD1300 to SD1331 with SECHSTEN the peripheral device and change the fuse of the output module whose bit has a value of 1 3 SE whether the external power supply for output load is ON or OFF One of the individual modules is experiencing hardware problems 1310 An interruption has occurred although there is no interrupt module jso check the modules Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative and explain the problem with the defective module Oo x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored There is an output module with a blown fuse There is an output module with a blown fuse 11 20 11 20 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LEDStatus Operating geg feo oce Error Messages Information Information LED ats Statuses of Diagnostic Timing i SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 x 1 ERROR CPU At power ON At reset When intelligent function module is accessed Stop 1401 SP UNIT DOWN Unit module No Off On Flicker On vente zk At power ON At reset When an intelligent function module access instruction is executed 1402 Program error location Stop SP UNIT DOWN Unit module No Off On Flicker On Continue Du
88. by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU module SD420 co nter Bagh SGaiv is set to RUN 3 e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 e Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU module Number of counts in is set to RUN each scan e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 e Used only for low speed execution type programs processing x Not counted by the scan in an initial execution type program 11 77 11 77 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 Scan information Execution program No Low speed program No Current scan time Maximum scan time Current scan time for low speed execution type programs Minimum scan time for low speed execution type programs Maximum scan time for low speed execution type programs 11 78 Meaning Execution type of program being executed File name of low speed execution in progress Current scan time ms unit Current scan time us unit Initial scan time ms unit Initial scan time us unit Minimum scan time ms unit Minimum scan time us unit Maximum scan time ms unit Maximum scan time us unit Current scan time ms unit Current scan time us unit Minimum scan time ms unit Minimum scan time us unit Maximum scan time ms unit Maximum scan time us unit END processing time ms unit END processing time us unit Special Register List Explanation Program number of pr
89. card install the battery POINTS Even if the battery is installed on the CPU module if a battery is not installed on the SRAM card the memory of the SRAM card will not be backed up Ensure to install the battery on the SRAM card Also if the battery is installed on the SRAM card but the CPU module has no battery the program memory standard RAM and latch devices of the CPU module are not backed up Similarly ensure to install the battery on the CPU module 3 Kind of file which can be stored on memory card Please refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals of section 6 1 for the kind of the file which can be stored on each memory card 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 4 The Names of The Parts of The Memory Card The names of the parts of the memory card are described below Descriptions Connector area connected to the CPU module Used to set the lithium battery for data backup of the SRAM memory SRAM card only Switch for fixing the battery holder to the memory card main module 2 Battery holder Battery holder fixing Locked at LOCK position write protect switch side switch LOCK Locked RELEASE Unlocked SRAM card only Used to set write inhibit in the memory At the time of shipping it is set at OFF Write protect switch SRAM card and Flash card only ON Data write inhibited OFF Data write enabled The battery holder fixing swit
90. card adapter Q2MEM ADP MELSEC Q P USB cable 1 To be procured yourself Only Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU can be used SI For how to write data to the memory card and the details of the USB cable refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM System configuration Maximum number of Extension Stages Maximum number of I O modules to be installed Maximum number of occupied UC points Extension base unit Extension cable MELSEC Q 3 Outline of system configuration a If the main base unit Q3OB is used Main base unit Q312B Power supply module 0123 4 5 67 8 9 1011 Slot No 00 20 40 60 80 Ao Co Teo 100 120 140 160 1F 3F 5F 7F 9F BF DF FF 11F 13FH5F 17F CPU module Extension base unit Q612B Power supply module 4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 oo 180 1A0 1C0 1E0 200 220 240 260 280 2A0 2c0 2E0 when 32 I O modules are oo A loaded to each slot E 19F 1BF 1DF1FF 21F 23F 25F 27F 29F 2BF 2DF 2F OO oo Extension base unit Q68B Extension base unit QA1S68B nd extension e Power supply module Sth extension Power supply module stage J 24 28 stage 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 xe 300 380 3A0 3C0 3EO Ee 5A0 SCO 5EO Go OO oo OO 20 Extension base unit Q68B eo tension base unit QA1 ard extension Power supply module en exension Power supply module
91. card usable flag The system is turned on when memory card is ready for use by user SM604 memory card use flag The system is turned on when the CPU module uses a memory card SM605 memory card detach inhibit flag This is turned on by the user to disable the memory card from being detached 4 To install the memory card while the power is turned on 1 Install the memory card 2 By monitoring GX Developer etc check that the special relays SM600 is turned on POINTS Install and remove the memory card while the power is turned on paying attention to the following 1 If the procedures specified above are not followed the data stored in the memory card may be destroyed When the CPU module operation at the time of occurrence of a parameter error is set to STOP the CPU module operation is stopped by the occurrence of ICM OPE ERROR 2 When the memory card is installed its mount processing is performed again As a result the scanning time is increased by several 10 ms max 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 6 Installation of Battery for CPU Module and Memory Card 1 The battery for the CPU module is shipped with its connector disconnected Connect the connector as follows Refer to Section 10 3 for the service life of the battery and how to replace the battery Open the cover at the CPU module s bottom Side of the CPU module Confirm that the battery is loaded correctly
92. check that the input signal is OFF Supply voltage Is it reaching the supply voltage value Output module failure y Check the external wiring and external input devices Monitor signal off Replace the output module Check the power supply load wire and recover the power supply Check the load wire and load and recover the power supply Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative y Confirm rush current when the load is at the maximum simultaneous on Change the output relay number and let the load maximum simultaneous on current to within the specification explaining a detailed description of the problem For the trouble that the input signal to the input module is not turned off troubleshoot referring to Section 11 5 Examples of I O Modules Troubleshooting 11 11 11 11 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 13 Flowchart for when unable to read a program The following shows the flowchart to be followed when communication with GX Developer cannot be made during PLC power on The CPU cannot communicate with the GX Developer Is the memory to be read correct Select the correct memory Can the CPU communicate with the GX Developer Is the connection cable connected properly Connect the connection cable properly an the CPU communicat with the GX Develo
93. created to the numerical values there parameter number and correct Check the space remaining in the memory card Read the error individual information at the peripheral device check to be sure that the program corresponds to the numerical values The file designated by the sequence program cannot be found there program location and correct Create a file created using parameters and load it to the CPU module The sequence program designated a file that cannot be designated niui a 2411 Read the error individual information at the peripheral device check am py the sequence SR comment file ee TER to be sure that the program corresponds to the numerical values 2412 Se program file is one that cannot be designated by the there program location and correct sequence program Read the error individual information at the peripheral device check No data has been written to the file designated by the sequence to be sure that the program corresponds to the numerical values program there program location and correct Check to ensure that the designated file has not been write protected Read the error common information at the peripheral device check 2500 There is a program file that uses a device that exceeds the device to be sure that the parameter device allocation setting and the allocation range designated by the parameter device settings program file device allocation correspond to the numerical values there file name and
94. e Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program Switches between ON and OFF in accordance with the number of milliseconds designated by SD415 When PLC power supply is turned OFF or a CPU module reset is performed goes from OFF to start e Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program e Relay repeats ON OFF switching at fixed scan intervals When PLC power supply is turned OFF or a CPU module reset is performed goes from OFF to start e The ON OFF intervals are set with the DUTY instruction DUTY ni n2 SM420 e For use with SM420 to SM424 low speed programs M9036 S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing M9037 M9038 M9039 S Every END processing New 8 M9034 format change S Status change S Status change S Status change S Status change Every END processing Every END processing 11 47 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List 4 Scan information aga ee E Low speed OFF Completed or not a N when ion type program is program executed Goes ON when low speed execution type prog i executed execution flag ON Execution under way processing e When this relay goes from OFF to ON the module service interval designate
95. ended Online registration errors during SFC STEP RUN d Reconduct the request after the processing has ended execution processing Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Check the setting contents and make a correction d Check the setting contents and make a correction Check the number of registrations and make a correction e e D O D B B12 Slo 3S 39 Ae 318 SQ 318 AQ 3 3 Sis 3 1 38 ss 3 2 3 a II SIF OIA DIA O15 DIS oO O13 0 2 2 ob oo 2 o D oO e ol OIF Oo Go OI GIS CO DIS aje ajg aja ai oll a SE H Zi oligo 3 gt 5 gt als gt gt gt S ls gt DI SIR D E 3 H sis O10 O10 ole GIF DIE OI OF ol FIP O B oe 3 D zjo 3 bi bi o o fe 2Olo ole a OI l ZIS 218 2 8 ois ole o ojc 2 5 ole ole ol Op SIS lS 6 SI SI x Si x zl xX zl x15 ols gt D Dllo IR O18 O18 2 o Io o 3 x 3 o 2lS 2 sie 2 2 2j o oje 2j GJS O 5 2 gja 2 D 5 2 98 alas Sle Sla Sla Sic S Sido Silo EH SIS 2 Ki 2 Sisi Sle Tf OP GIS j9 T 0 9 O12 O19 O13 S j3 z 2 lt 3lale o v jo mi v via M19 vja O19 Z SIN S D lt oln D IS alo nx o al al al L AER Q o oO ao bg D IS oi o OS O16 29 5 ot 5 Se n Qis 2 gt a Ra 2 2 ja 2 algal ajas EI eh Q oli Cc E cjo cS c cS
96. force the U New processing ON Does not force match SV value to match the PV value Keyboard input reception flag for PKEY instruction M775 processing during COM instruction OFF Performs all refresh QCPU processes Selects whether all refresh process or the refresh set with serial ON Performs the refresh SD778 is performed when COM instruction is executed number set the SD778 or later execution OFF Performs link refresh Selects whether only the general data process is Selection of link VON Performs no link performed for the execution of the COM instruction or the refresh refresh link refresh process is also performed CALL M776 SE EE OFF Local device disabled Ve Determines whether to enable disable the local device in U Status M777 Enable disabie OFF Local device disabled Ve Determines whether to enable disable the local device at U Status M780 S S local device t ON Local device enabled the program CALLED at CALL change S local device in ON Local device enabled the execution of interrupt programs change interrupt program CC Link OFF CC Link dedicated instruction executable le Switches ON when the number of the CC Link dedicated e dedicated U Status ON CC Link dedicated instructions that can be executed simultaneously reaches instruction not 32 Switches OFF when the number goes below 32 executable instruction executable change 7 Debug e m9 ICIL es S Status
97. if normal status is restored Comes ON it a momentary power interruption of less than 20ms occurred during use of the AC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON i Comes ON if a momentary power interruption of less M9005 sm1005 DEE Se e Gg EE than 10ms occurred during use of the DC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON Comes ON if a momentary power interruption of less than 1ms occurred during use of the DC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON 11 52 11 52 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details Relay _ Conversion Modification OFF Normal e Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less than M9006 SM1006 Battery low specified Turned off when battery voltage becomes ON Battery low normal OFF Normal e Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less than M9007 EE Pay lowelatch ON Battery low specified Remains on if battery voltage becomes normal M9008 SM1008 SM1 Self diagnosis OFF No error Turned on when error is found as a result of self error ON Error diagnosis Annunciator OFF No F number detected Turned on when OUT F of SET F instruction is executed E lee ON F number detected Switched off when SD1124 data is zeroed d e Turned on when operation error occurs during execution M9011 SM1011 SM56 Operation eror a No error of applica
98. in the master station Depends on the results of initial communication between a local or remote I O station and the master station OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of a local or remote I O ON Abnormal station Link status Relay M9233 M9235 M9236 M9237 M9238 M9241 Depends on whether or not the local station is executing a forward or a reverse loop test Master station Depends on whether or not the master station is in STOP Local station other than host station error OFF Normal Depends on whether or not a local station other than the ON Abnormal host is in error 11 58 11 58 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List 10 For redundant systems Host system CPU information 1 for Q4AR only SM1510 to SM1599 are only valid for redundant systems All off for standalone systems A A Set by ACPU Applicable OFF No hold e Specifies whether or not to hold the output value when a eM inet tee ON Hold range over occurs for the S IN instruction range check u Now OFF No hold e Specifies whether or not the output value is held when a SE EE ON Hold range over occurs for the S OUT instruction range check S New OFF Redundant system backup mode independent e Turns on when the operating mode is redundant system S New system separate Each END ON Redundant system separate mode em A fixed Start mode when Turns on when the start mode fora redundant system 8 power supply is on Previ
99. individual information is being stored 11 29 11 29 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code SDO x 1 In a multiple CPU system the MELSECNET H under control of another station is specified as the first I O number in the network setting parameter of the MELSECNET H The network parameters of the MELSECNET H operating in the ordinary station were rewritten to the control station or the network parameters of the MELSECNET H operating in the control station were rewritten to the ordinary station The network parameters are reflected on the module side by 1 The number of actually installed modules is different from that designated in the number of modules setting parameter of MELSECNET H 2 The head I O number of actually installed modules is different from that designated in the network parameter of MELSECNET H 3 Some data in the parameter cannot be handled 4 The station type of MELSECNET H has been changed while the power is on RESET type gt RUN is required to change the station Network parameters have not been written although the QnACPU is f the control station or the master station The link refresh range exceeded the file register capacity e When the station number of the MELSECNET H module is 0 the inter PLC network parameter setting has been made e When the station number of the MELSECNET H module is other than 0 the remote master parameter setting has been made The network No specified bya p
100. longer before dismounting the battery Even when the battery is dismounted the memories are backed up by the capacitor for a while However if the replacement time exceeds the guaranteed value specified in the table below the contents stored in the memories may be erased To prevent this trouble replace the battery speedily Backup time by capacitor Backup time by capacitor min 3 Replacing battery Turn off the PLC power supply Remove the CPU module from the base unit Side of the CPU module Open the cover of the CPU module i e Remove the old battery from its holder Front Insert a new battery into the holder in the correct direction Connect the lead to the connector Close the cover of the CPU module Install the CPU module into the base unit Turn on the PLC power supply Monitor OFF SM51 to verify on off ON Monitor SD52 to verify the bit number that is on Bits other than 0 are on Bit 0 is on The CPU module battery is faulty 10 7 The memory card battery is faulty Refer to Section 10 3 2 2 y Completion 10 7 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 2 SRAM card CPU module battery replacement procedure Replace the SRAM card battery in the following procedure POINTS Replace the battery while paying attention to the following a To back up the
101. module do not turn off the system protect set switch SW1 in advance When the switch is turned off the system will not be protected 1 When a program is written while CPU module is stopped When a program is written while the CPU module is stopped operate the switch in the order shown below 1 RUN STOP switch STOP RUN LED Turns off CPU module in stop status Write a program 2 RESET L CLR switch Tilt this switch to RESET once and return it to the original center position 3 RUN STOP switch STOP gt RUN RUN LED Turns on CPU module in running status 2 When a program is written while CPU module is running When a program is written while the CPU module is running the switch need not be operated POINTS 1 Even if the RUN STOP switch is set to RUN immediately after a program is written when the CPU module is in the stop status CPU module will not come into RUN status When the CPU module is reset with the RESET L CLR switch and the RUN STOP switch is set to RUN after a program has been written the CPU module can be brought into RUN status 2 If the CPU module is desired to be brought into RUN status without resetting it operate the RUN STOP switch from STOP to RUN RUN to STOP and STOP to RUN in that order After the seconds STOP to RUN switch operation the CPU module is brought into RUN status 3 When a program is written while the CPU module is running in boot operation the program
102. module of the Q Series Main base unit Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Extension of the AnS Series module 42 ji Extension of the Q Series module d O IW di C le SS Q50B extension base unit Q52B Q55B Q6LB extension base unit Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B Extension cable QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B QA1S60 extension base unit QA1S65B QA1S68B 5 CRP Power supply module WO module Intelligent function module of the AnS Series 1 The number of memory cards to be installed is one sheet The memory card must be selected from SRAM card Flash card and ATA card according to the application and capacity With commercial memory cards the Operation is not assured Power supply module 3 4 VO module Intelligent functio module of the Q Series x2 QA1S65B and QA1S68B extension base units are used for the power supply module I O module and special function module of the AnS series 3 The Q series power supply module is not required for the Q5OB type extension base unit 4 Q61SP cannot be used for the power supply module Use Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P or Q64P for the power supply module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q b If the slim type main base unit
103. of the ZNWR instruction constant source and or destination 4 Relevant station Corresponding station error ZNWR execution disabled ZNWR cannot be executed in the corresponding station One of the stations is not communicating The specified station is a remote I O station Stores whether the slave station corresponds to MELSECNET or MELSECNET II e Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET II stations become 1 Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET stations or unconnected become 0 Device number Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Bit b8 b7 L9 L8 L25 L24 L41 L40 L57 L56 b14 L15 L31 L47 L63 b13 L14 L30 L46 L62 b12 L13 L29 L45 L61 b11 L12 L28 Lad L60 b10 L11 L27 L43 L59 b9 L10 L26 L42 L58 b6 L7 L23 L39 L55 b5 L6 L22 L38 L54 b4 L5 L21 L37 L53 b2 L3 t19 L35 L51 If a local station goes down during the operation contents before going down are retained Contents of SD1224 to SD1227 and SD1228 to D1231 are ORed If the corresponding bit is 0 the corresponding bit of the special register above becomes valid e If the own master station goes down the contents before going down are also retained D1202 D1203 D1241 SD1242 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Forward loop during data link Reverse loop during data link L
104. only or to receive all slave stations e Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or S Initial New standby active is assumed For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether ou w U New to read from the link module For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate whether to write to the link module e Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or S Initial New standby active is assumed For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether U New to read from the link module U U U Initial U U S St e For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate whether to write to the link module e Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or standby active is assumed For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether to read from the link module e For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate whether to write to the link module e Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or standby active is assumed For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether to read from the link module e For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate whether to write to the link module Goes ON when a CC Link error is detected in any of the installed QU61QBT11 Goes OFF when normal operation is restored Go
105. or Q64P cannot be used for the power supply module Use Q61SP for the power supply module 2 The slim type main base unit does not have an extension cable connector The extension base unit and GOT cannot be connected Notes 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 2 Precaution on System Configuration This section describes hardware and software packages compatible with QCPU 1 Hardware a The number of modules to be installed and functions are limited depending on the type of the modules Applicable Module Up to 4 in total of inter PLC Q Series MELSECNET H network and remote I O network modules e QU71E71 ope Ethernet interface QJ71E71 B2 Up to 4 units e QU71E71 100 network module Q series CC Link system L QJ61BT11 No limit Weit master local module a limit Ke E data A E setting of automatic refresh function not allowed A1SD51S AnS series special function e A1SD21 S1 f module shown on the right A1SJ71J92 S3 Total of 6 units When GET PUT service is used Interrupt module i Se One unit only 1 A maximum of 4 modules if the network parameters for CC Link are set and controlled by the GX Developer There is no restriction in the number of modules when the parameters are set by the special purpose instructions for the CC Link For details on the CC Link System Master Local Unit that can set parameters with the special purpose instructions refer to the user s manu
106. or pressure welded with the specified tools or correctly soldered Imperfect connections could result in short circuit fires or erroneous operation Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it could result in short circuits fire or erroneous operation Tightening the terminal screws too far may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module Such debris could cause fires damage or erroneous operation The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER Do not touch the terminals while power is on Doing so could cause shock or erroneous operation Correctly connect the battery Also do not charge disassemble heat place in fire short circuit or solder the battery Mishandling of battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in injury and fires Switch all phases of the external power supply off when cleaning the module or retightening the terminal or module mounting screws Not doing so could result in electric shock Undertightening of terminal
107. position internal software 8 For version A for example 41H is stored Note The software version of the initial system may differ from the version indicated by the version information printed on the rear of the case Data check of serial PLC paS SS een In the self loopback test of the serial communication oaks communication ore P D9072 SD1072 communications SNe module the serial communication module writes reads check data automatically to make communication checks Number of See i Stores the number of empty blocks in the erhpiy blacks in communication request registration area to the remote D9081 SD1081 icati eee sal terminal module connected to the MELSECNET MINI Re S3 master unit A2C or A52G registrtion area 11 90 11 90 Transition condition Stores the transfer condition number in which error 84 D1053 Error transition number where error occurred in the SFC program in BIN code 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Ee MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special Register after Register for Conversion Conversion Modification Register for D9085 D1085 setting time a check value Microcomputer According to subroutine input corresponding data area head microcomputer device No package Special 1s to 65535s SD1090 SD1091 Head I O number for replacement Head I O number SD1094 for replacement D251 D1100 D9101 D1101 D9102 D1102 Bit p
108. power supply modules turned on Is the wiring of the power supply module correct NO Check the wire and turn on the power supply Can MODE LED be turned on Is the POWER LED for the power supply module turned on Exchange the power supply module and confirm if POWER LED is turned on Can MODE LED be turned on Is the extension cable connected properly Isn t IN connected to IN or OUT connected to OUT NO Connect the extension cable properly YES NO Can MODE LED YES be turned on RESET position Set the RESET L CLR switch in the neutral position Is the CPU module RESET L CLR switch in the neutral position Neutral position NO Can MODE LED YES be turned on Hardware fault Check operations in the order starting from the minimum system f If the module will not work D please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 11 3 11 3 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 3 F 11 4 lowchart for when the MODE LED is flickering MELSEC Q The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the MODE LED of the CPU module flickers at PLC power on at operation start or during operation MODE LED is flickering Did you make forced ON OFF setting Cancel forced ON OFF Is t
109. range 0 to 65535 SD549 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Stored every scan Sets I O number for module that measures service interval Service intervals for the module specified in SD550 are stored into SD551 SD552 when SM551 is turned ON Measurement is made in 100us increments SD551 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD552 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Set by When set S First END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Request Corresponding ACPU DU MELSEC Q Corresponding CPU 11 79 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Special Register List 5 Memory card ere Memory Memory SD600 cardA models Drive 1 SD602 RAM capacity Drive 2 SD603 ROM capacity Memory SD604 card A use conditions Memory Memory SD620 11 80 Indicates memory card A model installed B8 B7 B4 B3 Bo O lt gt 0 A Drive 1 0 Does not exist RAM model 1 SRAM 0 Does not exist Drive 2 1 SRAM ROM model 2 ATA FRASH 3 Flash ROM Indicates memory card A model installed B15 B8 B7 B4 B3 Bo 0 lt gt 0 gt 0 Does not exist 1 SRAM Drive 1 RAM model 0 Does not exist Drive 2 ROM model 2 E PROM 3 Flash ROM e Drive 1 capacity is stored in 1 kby
110. si UTECO A B E E GREECE Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN 5 Mavrogenous Str Box 426 GR 18542 Piraeus S 20124 Malm Phone 302 0 10 42 10 050 Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 302 0 10 42 12 033 Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 e mail uteco uteco gr e mail info beijer se Meltrade Automatika Kft HUNGARY ECONOTEC AG SWITZERLAND 55 Harmat St Postfach 282 H 1105 Budapest Phone 36 0 1 2605 602 Fax 36 0 1 2605 602 e mail office meltrade hu CH 8309 N rensdort Phone 41 0 1 838 48 11 Fax 41 0 1 838 48 12 e mail info econotec ch GTS Dar laceze Cad No 43 KAT 2 TR 80270 Okmeydani Istanbul Phone 90 0 212 320 1640 Fax 90 0 212 320 1649 e mail gts turk net CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE 15 M Raskova St Fl 10 Office 1010 UA 02002 Kiev Phone 380 0 44 238 83 16 Fax 380 0 44 238 83 17 e mail csc a csc a kiev ua TURKEY AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd Private Bag 2016 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 27 0 11 928 2000 Fax 27 0 11 392 2354 e mail cbi cbi co za SOUTH AFRICA MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE TEXEL Electronics LTD Box 6272 IL 42160 Netanya Phone 972 0 9 863 08 91 Fax 972 0 9 885 24 30 e mail texel_ me netvision net il ISRAEL EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVE AVTOMATIKA SEVER Krapivnij Per 5 Of 402 RU 194044 St Petersburg Phone 7 812 1183 238 Fax 7 812 3039 648 e mail pav
111. specified with base allocation setting Remove the module installed at the I O points later than the 4 096th point Change the last module to a module which does not exceed the 4 096th point Install a module which can be used with the CPU The intelligent function module is experiencing hardware problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Eliminate empty slots between the CPU modules Set empty slots on the right side of the CPU modules Remove the modules which are not the QCPU modules loaded between the QCPU modules and fit the slots with the QCPUs Load the motion controller modules on the right side of the QCPUs Change the intelligent function module for the one compatible with the multiple CPU system function version B Change the setting of the control CPU of the intelligent function module incompatible with the multiple CPU system to station 1 heck and correct the setting of the parameter enabled drive switch Put a parameter file in the drive designated by the parameter enabled drive switch QCPU function Ver B or later heck and correct the setting of the parameter enabled drive switch Put a boot file in the drive designated by the parameter enabled drive switch Remove memory card after placing the memory card in out switch OFF Turn on the card insert switch after inserting a memory card Format memory card Reformat memory card Check memory card Execute automatic write
112. starting device tind i iti Specify the device that may be specified for the refresh device 2 The device specified is other than the one that may be specified B The number of send points is an odd number 3 Set the number of send points to an even number 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored The number of devices set at the parameter device settings exceeds the possible CPU module range The high speed interrupt parameter is set in a QO2CPU 11 28 11 28 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LEDStatus Operating S gege Gei oce Error Messages Information Information LED Status Statuses of Diagnostic Timing 2 SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 x 1 ERROR CPU l a 8 the 3101 3102 d At power ON Reset Be PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Flicker STOP _ RUN 3103 3104 3105 LINK PARA ERROR File name drive name Parameter number Flicker When an END instruction is 3106 executed LINK PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Flicker At power ON Reset STOP RUN 3107 LINK PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Flicker At power ON Reset STOP RUN 3200 L 38201 3202 SFC PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Flicker STOP RUN 3203 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where
113. the Q50B in the final extension stage b How to calculate voltage to IN connector The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4 90VDC Therefore the Q50B can be used if the voltage drop is 0 15VDC or lower 4 9VDC 4 75VDC 0 15VDC Main base unit OC Extension Cable Power Extension Cable suppl Conductor SE pply Type A module Resistance Q Vi R1 Extension base unit OSC QC05B 0 044 A QC06B 0 051 Y Extension stage 1 zg QC12B 0 082 QC30B 0 172 V2 R2 Extension base unit OSC QC50B 0 273 eel SE Extension stage 2 QC100B 0 530 2 I N SE WK I R Extension base unit Q50B 1 Symbol Description Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit Extension stage 7 Voltage drop at the extension cable between the extension base unit extension stage n 1 and extension base unit extension stage n Vn R1 Cable resistance between the main base unit and extension base unit Cable resistance between the extension base unit extension stage n 1 and extension base unit extension stage n Rn 11 to I7 5VDC current consumption among extension stage 1 to 7 1 x1 Sum total of current consumed by Q50B and currents consumed by the I O intelligent function modules loaded on the Q50B The symbols including I 11 to I7 vary with the modules loaded on the extension base un
114. the error codes 4000H to 4FFFH The error contents of the error codes 4000H to 4FFFH detected by the CPU module and the messages displayed by the GX Developer are shown below Error code Error dh f Error description Countermeasure hexadecimal item Check the connection status of the connection cable Sum check error with the CPU module Remote request that is not handled was executed Command for which a global request cannot be 9 q Check the requested command performed was executed CPU module cannot execute the request it q Turn off the CPU module system protect switch contents because it is in system protect The volume of data handled according to the Reduce the volume of data to that which can be specified request is too large processed at the specified request The password cannot be deleted Delete the set password Check the requested remote operation The CPU module is not BUSY The buffer is not vacanij After the free time has passed reexecute the request The CPU module is running to the request contents cannot be executed The CPU module is not in the STEP RUN error Execute after setting the CPU module to STEP RUN Execute after setting the CPU module to STOP status CPU mode 4011H status so the request contents cannot be executed status App 2 App 2 APPENDICES Error code hexadecimal 4021H 40224 4023H 40244 4025H 4033H App 3 MELSEC Q Error ee iem Error d
115. the error persists after corrections have been made contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Write after correcting network parameters If the error persists after corrections have been made contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative O Rem QCPU function Ver B or later Delete the CC Link setting parameter of the Q series CC Link module under control of another station Change the setting to the first I O number of the Q series CC Link module under control of the host station Write after correcting network parameters If the error persists after corrections have been made contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative The contents of the Ethernet parameter are incorrect Write after correcting parameters QnA The CC Link link refresh range exceeded the file register capacity The network refresh parameter for CC Link is out of range Change the file register file for the one refresh enabled in the whole range Ver B or later Check the parameter setting Ss 3107 The contents of the CC Link parameter are incorrect Check the parameter setting 3200 The parameter contents are incorrect 3201 The contents of the SFC block attribute information are incorrect 3202 The number of step relays designated in the parameters is less than the number used by the program 3203 on GX Configurator differs from the actual I O number Write after correcting parameters The execution t
116. the first module S Initial New reception 3rd module Status Information from SD383 Configuration is identical to that for the first module 4th module Stores the internal system software version in ASCII code The software version is stored in the lower byte position Higher byte Lower byte The data in the higher byte Software Internal system position is indefinite SD392 F S Initial version software version For version A for example 41H is stored Note The internal system software version may differ from the version indicated by the version symbol printed on the case Multiple PLC Multiple PLC eina multiple PLC system configuration the PLC number of the R QCPU function SD395 number nufmb r host CPU is stored S Initial Ver B or later PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 3 System clocks counters Corresponding Set b Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation When a ACPU ponang je Following programmable controller CPU module RUN 1 is 1 second Number of counts in S Status D412 added each second 1 nd uni counter second unis e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 2 i SD414 Se Sg cond 2n second clock e Stores value n of 2n second clock Default is 30 units Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 setting e Stores value n of 2nms clock Default is 30 setting e Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 Sean Number of aountein e Incremented
117. to standard ROM on the CPU module which is compatible with automatic write to standard ROM Using GX Developer perform write of parameters and programs to standard ROM Change the memory card for the one where automatic write to standard ROM has not been set and perform boot operation from the memory card Read the error individual information at the peripheral device check to be sure that the parameter drive name and file name correspond to the numerical values there parameter number and correct Create a file created using parameters and load it to the CPU module Change to QnACPU with the function version B Delete the QnA Ethernet parameter x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 26 11 26 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LED pes Operating geg feo SCH Error Messages Information Information LED Status Statuses of Diagnostic Timing j SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 x 1 ERROR CPU 2401 FILE SET ERROR File name Parameter number At power ON At reset 2410 2411 Stop FILE OPE ERROR File name Program error location Off On Flicker ON Continue When instruction is executed 2412 x2 2413 2500 2501 CANT EXE PRG File name Off Flicker Stop At power ON At reset 2502 2504 3000 At power ON Reset PARAMETER ERROR File name STOP RUN Parameter number Off Fli
118. written during the running is written into the program memory After a program has been written while the CPU module is running write the program also into the boot original memory Failure to write a program into the boot original memory will run an old program at the time of the next boot operation For details of the boot operation refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 4 Latch Clear Operation To perform latch clear operate the RESET L CLR switch in the following procedure 1 RUN STOP switch STOP 2 RESET L CLR switch Move the switch to L CLR several times until the USER LED flickers USER LED Flicker Ready for latch clear 3 RESET L CLR switch Move the switch to L CLR once more USER LED OFF Latch clear complete POINTS 1 The ineffective range for latch clear can be set for each device by the device setting parameter 2 In addition to the way of using the RESET L CLR switch for latch clear remote latch clear may be performed from GX Developer For details of the remote latch clear operation using GX Developer refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 4 5 Executing Automatic Write to Standard ROM 1 Order of execution for automatic write to standard ROM Automatic write to the standard ROM is carried
119. 0 to 1000VAC and 75 to 1500VDC to satisfy the safety requirements In Sections 8 2 1 to 8 2 6 cautions on installation and wiring of the MELSEC Q series PLC to conform to the Low Voltage Directive are described We have put the maximum effort to develop this material based on the requirements and standards of the regulation that we have collected However compatibility of the devices which are fabricated according to the contents of this manual to the above regulation is not guaranteed Each manufacturer who fabricates such device should make the final judgement about the application method of the Low Voltage Directive and the product compatibility 8 2 1 Standard applied for MELSEC Q series PLC The standard applied for MELSEC Q series PLC is EN61010 1 safety of devices used in measurement rooms control rooms or laboratories The MELSEC Q series PLC modules which operate at the rated voltage of 50VAC 75VDC or above are also developed to conform to the above standard The modules which operate at the rated voltage of less than 50VAC 75VDC are out of the Low Voltage Directive application range 8 2 2 MELSEC Q series PLC selection 1 Power supply module There are dangerous voltages voltages higher than 42 4V peak inside the power supply modules of the 100 200VAC rated I O voltages Therefore the CE marked models are enhanced in insulation internally between the primary and secondary 2 I O module There are dangerous voltages voltag
120. 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU Do E e Individual information corresponding to error codes SDO is stored SD16 here e There are the following six different types of stored information File name Drive name Example Number Meaning AE IJK SD16 Drive B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD17 42H 41H A SD17 SDi8 File name 44H D 43H C SD19 ASCII code 8 characters 46H F 45H E SD20 48H H 47H G SD21 Extension 2EH 49H I 2EH SD22 ASCII code 3 characters 4BH K 4AH J SD23 SD24 Vi t SD18 D25 Vacant SD26 Time value actually measured mber Meaning Nu SD16 Time 1 us units 0 to 999 us SD17 Time 1 ms units 0 to 65535 ms SD18 SD20 SD21 SD22 Vacant SD23 SD24 SD25 SD20 SD26 Program error location Number Meaning SD16 SD17 File name Error SD18 ASCII code 8 characters Error individual SD19 SD21 information individual D20 Extension 2EH S Error New O Rem information SD21 ASCII code 3 characters SD22 Pattern SD23 Block No SD24 Step No transition No SD25 Sequence step No L SD26 Sequence step No H SD22 x Contents of pattern data 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number 0 0 to 0 O k __SFC block designation present
121. 13 FFFFu fixed 2114 2115 SP UNIT ERROR Unit module No Program error location Flicker On Flicker On ir When instruction is executed 2116 2117 2120 2121 2122 DEN SP UNIT LAY ERR Flicker Stop Ai power ON At reset 2125 2126 SP UNIT LAY ERR Unit module No At power ON At rese 2150 SP UNIT VER ERR Unit module No At power ON At reset SS e zue g poner EE a a acl 2300 Stop pi ICM OPE ERROR Drive Name Off On Flicker On Continue W pen memory card is inserted or 2301 x2 2302 2400 FILE SET ERROR Parameter number Stop At power ON At reset 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x 2 The CPU module operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 11 25 11 25 11 TROUBLESHOOTING robo ot Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action Station not loaded was specified using the instruction whose target was the PLC share memory 1 The location designated by the FROM TO instruction set is not a special function module 2 The special function module Network module being accessed is faulty The location designated by a link direct device J network module 1 The location designated by a special function module dedicated instruction is not a special function module 2 The network number specified by the network dedicated instruction does not ex
122. 1413 An error is detected on the system bus e Wait length time out arbitration time out Fault of the loaded module was detected The High Performance model QCPU of function version A was 1414 loaded in a multiple CPU system configuration An error is detected on the system bus 1415 Fault of the main or extension base unit was detected System bus fault was detected at PLC power on or CPU module 1416 reset 1421 Hardware fault at the system management module AS92R MELSEC Q Corres Corrective Action ponding CPU QCPU Rem This suggests a CPU module hardware error Contact your nearest QCPU Mitsubishi representative Rem The special function module that was being accessed is experiencing hardware problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative The CPU module is experiencing hardware problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative The special function module that was being accessed is experiencing hardware problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative The intelligent function module that was being accessed is experiencing hardware problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative A special function module the CPU module or the base unit is experiencing problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative hange the High Performance model QCPU of function version A for the High Performance model QCPU of function version B 2 An intelligent function module CPU
123. 1S60B Remove the module mounting screw and using the bottom Base unit of the module as a support L pull the top of the module Module connector Module toward you Module fixing hole d Lift the module upwards and remove the module fixing projections from the module fixing hole Completion gt POINT To remove the module make sure to remove the module fixing screws and then disengage the module fixing projection from the module fixing hole Do not try to remove the module forcibly since this may damage the module fixing projection 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 4 How to Set Stage Numbers for the Extension Base Unit When using two or more extension base units their stage numbers must be set with their stage number setting connectors Extension 1 need not be set since the extension number is factory set to 1 Make this setting in the following procedure 1 The stage number setting connector of the extension base unit is located under the IN side base cover Refer to Section 6 4 for the setting of the extension number setting connector First loosen the upper and lower screws in the IN side base cover and remove the base cover from the extension base unit 2 Insert the connector pin in the required stage number location of the connector PIN1 existing between the IN and OUT sides of the extension cable connector
124. 21 END D1622 SD22 SD1622 SD23 SD1623 SD24 gt SD1624 D1623 SD25 gt SD1625 SD26 gt SD1626 D1624 D1625 D1626 D1650 Switch status CPU switch e Stores the CPU module switch status S Each Now status e Refer to SD200 for the storage status SD1650 SD200 END e Stores the CPU module s LED status e Sh hi ff 1 wh 2wh Each SD1651 LED status CPU LED status ove en turned off 1 when turned on and 2 when S Eacl New flicking END e Refer to SD201 for the storage status SD1651 SD201 JMI Jajaja n Nn NIN Stores the individual information for the error code Refer to n SD1653 CPU operation CPU operation Stores the CPU module operation status Refer to SD203 for S Each New status status the storage status SD1653 SD203 END x 1 Stores other system CPU self diagnosis information and system information 2 Shows the special register SD _ _ for the host system CPU 15 For redundant systems Trucking for Q4AR only SD1700 to SD1799 is valid only for redundant systems These are all 0 for standalone systems Corresponding A Number Name Meaning Explanation aena ACPU E sp 2 Trucking error Trucking error Error D1700 ue geo ae S HEI ls Make it the trucking error detection 1 S Erro New Q4AR detection count j detection count occurrence 2 Shows the special register SD _ _ for the host system CPU 11 99 11 99 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDICES AP
125. 226 SM1226 Reverse loop error OF Hommel Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line ON Abnormal OFF Not being executed M9227 SM1227 Loop test status ON Forward or reverse loop Local station OEE RUN Or sree Depends on whether or not a local station is in STOP or el e operation status status PAUSE mode P ON STOP or PAUSE status test execution underway 11 57 Depends on whether or not the master station is executing a forward or a reverse loop test 11 57 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Details Conversion Modification Local station SM1233 error detect status Local station remote I O station parameter error detect status Local station remote I O OFF No communications station initial ON Communications communications underway status Local station remote I O station error Local station remote I O OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward and reverse station forward or ON Abnormal loop lines of a local or a remote I O station reverse loop error OFF Online ON Offline station to Depends on whether the local station is online or offline or stationtest or self is in station to station test or self loopback test mode loopback test SM1241 Polar oop OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line error ON Abnormal Reverse loop line OFF Normal QnA M9242
126. 5 L4 L3 L2 L1 SD1221 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17 SD1222 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33 SD1223 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 L50 L49 If a local station acting as the master station of tier three detects a parameter error or a remote station contains an invalid I O assignment the bit corresponding to the station number becomes 1 Example When local station 5 and remote I O station 14 detect an error bits 4 and 13 in SD1220 become 1 and when SD1220 is monitored its value is 8208 2010n Stores the local or remote station numbers while they are communicating the initial data with their relevant master station Device Bit number b8 b5 SD1224 We H SD1225 30 2 EN EN D1226 Kg u3 801227 62 amp E EN The bit corresponding to the station number which is currently communicating the initial settings becomes 1 Example When stations 23 and 45 are communicating bit 6 of SD1225 and bit 12 of SD1226 become 1 and when SD1225 is monitored its value is 64 40x and when SD1226 is monitored its value is 4096 1000x Stores the local or remote station numbers which ar
127. 9 ON Drive 3 present Goes ON when drive 3 card 2 RAM area is present S Initia New OFF No drive 4 Always ON ew QCPU ON Drive 4 present Goes ON when drive 4 card 2 ROM area is present e S Memory card B OFF Not used i ey Q2A S1 ON Inuse Goes ON when memory card B is in use New Q3A SM623_ Drive 4 flag rf Memory card B OFF Remove insert enabled Q4A SM625 remove insert ON Remove insert Goes ON when memory card B cannot be inserted or d Q4AR prohibit flag prohibited EES 8 OFF File register not used 3 i me S Status N SM640 File register use ON File register in use Goes ON when file register is in use change Comment use OFF Fie register not used Goes ON when comment file is in use SEN New ON File register in use change OFF Internal memory execution Goes ON while boot operation is in process S Status ON Boot operation in Goes OFF if boot designation switch is OFF change progress New ew SM609 SM620 SM624 SM650 n a kd Ei D oO fe 9 o ke T S fe 5 Goes ON when access is made to area outside the range OFF Within access range of file register R of memory card A ON Outside access range Set within END processing e Reset at user program Memory card A access range flag n a SI N o fo Ki an EI be g 11 48 11 48 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Special Relay List Continued Meaning Explanation When Set G
128. 997 Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directive required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a CE mark on their products 8 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive The EMC Directive specifies that products placed on the market must be so constructed that they do not cause excessive electromagnetic interference emissions and are not unduly affected by electromagnetic interference immunity The applicable products are requested to meet these requirements The sections 8 1 1 through 8 1 6 summarize the precautions on conformance to the EMC Directive of the machinery constructed using the MELSEC Q series PLCs The details of these precautions has been prepared based on the control requirements and the applicable standards control However we will not assure that the overall machinery manufactured according to these details conforms to the above mentioned directives The method of conformance to the EMC Directive and the judgment on whether or not the machinery conforms to the EMC Directive must be determined finally by the manufacturer of the machinery 8 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive The standards applicable to the EMC Directive are listed below 30 M 230 MHz QP 30 dB u V m EN55011 Electromagnetic emissions from the 30 m in measurement range 1 Radiated noise 2 product are measured 230 M 1000 MHz QP 37 dB u V m 30 m in
129. A 1S I61 module QnA Rem Keep the number of computer link modules excludes A 1S J71QU24 installed to 6 or fewer 1 Reduce the number of QI60 A1SI61 modules loaded in the single PLC system to one 2 Change the number of QI60 A1SI61 modules set to the same control PLC to only one in the multiple CPU system 3 Reduce the number of A1SI61 modules to only one in the multiple CPU system When using an interrupt module with each QCPU in a multiple CPU system change it for the QI60 Use one A1SI61 module max three QI60 modules or only the QI60 modules QCPU function Ver B or later The QI60 is loaded Remove the QI60 Two or more AIS61 interrupt modules have been installed Install only 1 AGT module At the MELSECNET MINI auto refresh parameter settings the 2104 module allocation that was set is different from the actual module models at the station numbers in the link system There are too many special function modules that can use dedicated instructions allocated number of modules installed The total of the figures indicated below is above 1344 Number of AD59 modules installed x Number of AD57 S1 AD58 modules installed x Number of AJ71C24 S3 S6 S8 modules installed x 2105 Number of AJ71UC24 modules installed x 10 Number of AJ71PT32 S3 AJ71T32 S3 modules installed x 125 Number of AJ71C21 S1 modules installed x Z Number of AJ71QC24 R2 R4 modules installed x 29 Number of AJ71ID1 2
130. AR only D1510 to SD1599 are only valid for redundant systems They are all set to 0 for standalone systems Corresponding Corresponding Set by ACPU When set Set the basic period 1 second units use for the process D1500 Basic period control instruction using floating point data Basic period D1901 tome Floating points data SD1501 SD1500 Process control Process control instruction detail instruction detail error code error code e Shows the detailed error contents for the error that occurred S Error in the process control instruction occurrence Process control Process control instruction instruction Shows the error process block that occurred in the process S Error generated error generated error control instruction occurrence location location Operation mode A e Shows the power out time S during the automatic switch Hot start switch wee f Ta CPU start from hot start to initial start in the operation mode when the S Initial power out time CPU module is started up SD1590 SS request Request origin e Stores the request origin at work No when the SM1590 is S Error network No network No turned on occurrence 1 Host system CPU information is stored 11 98 11 98 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue 14 For redundant systems Other system CPU information 1 for Q4AR only SD1600 to SD1659 is only valid during the back up mode for
131. B Q6LB type and then connect the QA1S6LB type When setting the No of the extension stages set it from Q50B Q6LB in order Although there are no particular restrictions in the order of the installation of the Q501B and Q6LB refer to Section 6 6 for usability 6 Connect the extension cable from OUT of the extension cable connector of the base unit to IN of the extension base unit on the next stage 7 If 65 or more modules are installed an error will occur 8 When the GOT is bus connected it occupies one extension stage and one slot 9 The High Performance model QCPU processes the GOT as a 16 point intelligent function module Hence connecting one GOT decreases 16 points available for the base unit 10 Q61SP cannot be used for the power supply module Use Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P or Q64P for the power supply module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q b If the slim type main base unit Q30SB is used Slim type main base unit Q35SB 0 1 2 3 4 4 Slot No 00 20 40 60 80 ds 1F 3F 5F 7F 9F Power supply NS module CPU module System configuration k The above system assumes that each slot is loading with a 32 point module Maximum number of No extension allowed Extension Stages Maximum number of I O modules to be 5 modules installed Maximum number of A Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Extension base unit Cannot be connected 1 Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P
132. Controllers Please read this manual carefully so that equipment is used to its optimum CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS asec siccack a hi ee sheenas ch A hi cease sca cach aa EE A 1 REVISIONS ver 355 ere feig eege Eege ee fe ins bie ee A 6 ENTENTE Sew ented e oh Bee Dah E dee EE EE SS aa Em Sink ae Aen No a ek A 7 lee Ela alli cs cue esse fot EE A 17 How to Vse This ManualS dese eee ee ENEE NEEN a iis ed A 18 About the Generic Terms and Abbreviatons A A 19 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 4 a WG 1 2 N h gt oO N 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM 2 1 System Configuratio N ssis ipinin EES REES 2 1 2 2 Precaution on System Configuration cecceccecesseceeceeceeeeeeeeceeeeaeeaesaeceeseeeeaesaeseeeeaeeaesaeseeseaeeaseeseaeeaees 2 6 2 3 Confirming the Serial Number and Function Version 2 8 3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 2 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE 4 1t0o4 9 4 1 Performance Specification cccscccceccecesseeeeceeceeeeeecaeceeeceeeecaecaeeeeeeaeeaecaesaeeaecaeseeeaseaesaeseesaesaeseeeeaseaees 4 1 4 2 Part Names and Settings AA 4 4 4 3 Switch Operation After Writing in Program 4 7 44 Latch Clear Operation WEE 4 8 4 5 Executing Automatic Write to Standard DON 4 8 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 1to5 11 E Ee Aereo ET 5 1 5 1 1 Power supply module specifications A 5 1 5 1 2 Selecting the power supply mocdule 5 6 5 1 3 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power Supply
133. E MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM 19 1 Flow chart for Starting Up the Multiple CPU System 19 2 Setting Up the Multiple CPU System Parameters Multiple PLC Settings Control PLC Settings 19 2 1 System configuration 19 2 2 Creating new systems 19 2 3 Using existing preset multiple CPU settings and I O allocations APPENDICES APPENDIX 1 Special Relay List APPENDIX 2 Special Register List APPENDIX 3 List of Interrupt Pointer Nos and Interrupt Factors INDEX About Manuals The following manuals are related to this product Referring to this list please request the necessary manuals Related Manuals Manual Name Manual Number Model Code High Performance model QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals SH 080038 This manual explains the functions programming methods devices and so on necessary to create 13JL98 programs with the High Performance model QCPU sold separately QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions See This manual describes how to use the sequence instructions basic instructions and application 13 JF58 instructions sold separately QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual PID Control Instructions SH 080040 This manual describes the dedicated instructions used to exercise PID control sold separately 13JF59 QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC tear This manual explains the system configuration performance specifications functions programming 13 JF60
134. ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 21 02 486 0 Fax 49 0 21 02 4 86 11 20 e mail megfamail meg mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FRANCE EUROPE B V 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 1 55 68 56 85 e mail factory automation fra mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC UK EUROPE B V Travellers Lane GB Hatfield Herts AL10 8 XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Via Paracelso 12 l 20041 Agrate Brianza MI Phone 39 039 6053 1 Fax 39 039 6053 312 e mail factory automation it mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPAIN EUROPE B V Carretera de Rub 76 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Phone 34 9 3 565 3131 Fax 34 9 3 589 2948 e mail industrial sp mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 6221 6060 Fax 81 3 6221 6075 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USA AUTOMATION 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 22 83 EUROPE ITALY JAPAN GEVA Wiener Stra e 89 A 2500 Baden Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 e mail office geva at AUSTRIA
135. Hz l intermittent 0 003inch to D 2 10 times each in Vibration resistance vibration 57to150Hz ans JIS B 3502 57 to 150Hz m s X Y Z directions continuous 0 001 inch vibration 5710150Hz aus Conforming to JIS B 3502 IEC 61131 2 147 me 3 times in each of 3 directions X Y Z No corrosive gases 2000m 6562ft max Installation location Inside control panel Overvoltage category 1 Pollution level x2 Il max x1 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V 2 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used Pollution level 2 is when only non conductive pollution occurs A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected occasionally 3 The storage ambient temperature is 20 to 75 C if the system includes the AnS series modules 4 The operating ambient humidity and storage ambient humidity are 10 to 90 RH if the system includes the AnS series modules 5 Do not use or store the PLC under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Doing so can cause a malfunction
136. IN code Sets the interval between consecutive program starts in multiples of 10 ms 0 No setting 1 to 200 Set Program is executed at intervals of set value x 10 ms e Scan time is stored and updated in BIN code after every END When the PC CPU starts running it starts counting 1 every second Count repeats changing from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 e Year lower 2 digits and month are stored into D1025 in BCD code as shown below B15 to Bi2Bi1 to B8B7 to B4B3 to BO or Month Day and hour are stored into SD1026 in BCD code as shown below B15 to B12B11_ to B8B7 to B4B3 to o Example H3110 noy igure e Minute and second are stored into SD1027 in BCD code as shown below B15 to B12B11 to B8 B7 to B4 B3 to Was Second H3548 Day of week is stored into SD1028 in BCD code as shown below B15 to B12B11 to B8B7 to B4B3 to Bo Po Sunday Ps Saturday_ Example 1987 July H8707 Example 35 minutes Example Friday H0005 0 must be set e Designate the device number for the extension file register for direct read and write in 2 words at SD1036 and SD1037 in BIN data Use consecutive numbers beginning with RO of block No 1 to designate device numbers Exetension file register Block No 1 area Block No 2 area D1036 SD1037 Device No BIN data Sets priority of ERROR LEDs which illuminate or flicker to indicate errors with error code numbers Configurat
137. LSEC Q POINTS 1 Overcurrent protection The overcurrent protection device shuts off the 5 V 24 VDC circuit and stops the system if the current flowing in the circuit exceeds the specified value The LED of the power supply module is unlit or lit dimly upon a voltage drop If this device is activated switch the input power supply off and eliminate the cause such as insufficient current capacity or short Then a few minutes later switch it on to restart the system The initial start for the system takes place when the current value becomes normal Overvoltage protection The overvoltage protection device shuts off the 5 VDC circuit and stops the system if a voltage of 5 5 VDC is applied to the circuit When this device is activated the power supply module LED is switched OFF If this happens switch the input power OFF then a few minutes later ON This causes the initial start for the system to take place The power supply module must be changed if the system is not booted and the LED remains OFF Allowable momentary power failure period 1 For AC input power supply e An instantaneous power failure lasting less than 20ms will cause AC down to be detected but operation will continue e An instantaneous power failure lasting more than 20ms may cause the operation to continue or initial start to take place depending on the power supply load Furthermore by using the same AC power supply for the AC input module and the power supp
138. Minimum value of low speed program scan time is stored into SD532 SD533 Measurement is made in 100s increments SD532 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD533 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Maximum value of low speed program scan time with the exception of the first scan is stored into SD534 SD535 Measurement is made in 100us increments SD534 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD535 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Time from scan program end until next scan start is stored into SD540 SD541 Measurement is made in 100ys increments SD540 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD541 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 MELSEC Q Corresponding RELDY ACPU When set Corresponding S Status change S Every END processing S Every END processing D9017 format change S Every END processing S First END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing D9018 format change D9019 format change New S Every END processing processing S Every END processing S Every END processing processing 11 78 11 ove SD542 Constant scan wait time SD543 Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type sho programs Execution time for low speed execution type programs Scan program execution time Service interval measurement mo
139. ONTROL BUS ERR occurs at PLC power on or during operation This flow chart can be confirmed only when a specific slot oase unit can be detected by the error code CONTROL BUS ERR occurs Check the slot base unit where error occurred with the GX Developer Is the module of the applicable slot installed properly Is the extension cable of the applicable base unit installed properly NO Install the module and cable properly YES NO Is the ERR LED YES turned off Are all the extension cables of the base unit connected properly Install the extension cable properly YES NO Is the ERR LED turned off YES Proper operation Replace the applicable module Error detection Proper operation Replace the CPU module Error detection Replace the applicable Proper operation base unit Error detection Hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description y of the problem Completion 11 17 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 Error Code List If a fault occurs when the PLC power supply is switched on when the CPU is switched from STOP to RUN or during RUN the High Performance model QCPU displays an error on the LED using the self diagnostic function and stores the error information into the special relays SM and special registers
140. OTING MELSEC Q 11 2 8 When the USER LED is turned on If the USER LED turns on follow the steps described below The USER LED turns on when an error is detected by the CHK instruction or the annunciator F turns on If the USER LED is on monitor the special relays SM62 and SM80 in the monitor mode of GX Developer e When M62 has turned ON The annunciator F is ON Using SD62 to SD79 check the error cause e When SM80 has turned ON The USER LED was on by the execution of the CHK instruction Using SD80 check the error cause Eliminate the error cause after confirming it The USER LED can be turned off by e Making a reset with the RESET L CLR switch or e Executing the LEDR instruction in the sequence program When the RESET L CLR switch is tilted to L CLR several times for latch clear operation the USER LED flickers to indicate that the latch clear processing is under operation When the RESET L CLR switch is further tilted to L CLR while the USER LED flickers the USER LED turns off and terminates the latch clear processing 11 2 9 When the BAT LED is turned on If the BAT LED turns on follow the steps described below The BAT LED turns on when a low battery capacity is detected If the BAT LED is on monitor the special relays and special registers in the monitor mode of GX Developer to check which of the CPU module and SRAM card batteries was lowered in capacity SM51 to SM52 SD51 to SD52
141. PENDIX 1 Error Code Return to Origin During General Data Processing The CPU module returns an error code to the general data processing request origin when an error occurs and there is a general data processing request form the peripheral equipment intelligent function module or network system If an error occurs App when a general data processing is requested from the peripheral devices intelligent function module and network system This error code is not an error that is detected by the CPU module self diagnosis function so it is not stored in the special relay SD0 When the request origin is a GX Developer a message or an error code is displayed When the request origin is an intelligent function module or network system an error is returned to the process that was requested APPENDIX 1 1 Error code overall explanation These error codes differs depending on the error No of the location the error was detected The following table shows the relationship between the error detection location and the error code Error detection location Eror Coue Error description reference destination hexadecimal CPU module 4000H to 4FFFH Refer to Appendix 1 2 Intelligent function 70004 to 7FFFH User s manuals of intelligent function module module Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Network system FOOOH to FFFFH Reference Manual App 1 App 1 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 1 2 Description of the errors of
142. PU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 3 Confirming the Serial Number and Function Version The CPU module serial No can be confirmed on the rated plate and GX Developer s system monitor 1 Confirming the serial No on the rated plate The serial No and function version can be confirmed on the rating plate a MITSUBISHI Serial No First five digits MODEL a Function version SERIAL 020920000000000 B U LISTED 80M1 J IND CONT EQ MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN J 2 Confirming the serial No on the system monitor list of product information The CPU module serial No and function version can be confirmed with the list of product information on the GX Developer Version 6 or later system monitor Serial Nos and function versions of the intelligent function module and CPU module can also be confirmed Serial number Function version Product Information List Intelli Q QU71LP21 25 32pt 0000 020810000000000 e None lt bi None 8 8 None None 8 CSV file creating Close 3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Performance specification of PLC is as follows Specifications Operating ambient temperature Storage ambient temperature Operating ambient S 5 to 95 RH 4 non condensing humidity Storage ambient Pa 5 to 95 RH 4 non condensing humidity Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Under 0 075mm Conforming 10 to 57
143. Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special l i Corresponding Special Register after Register for Meaning Details CPU Conversion Conversion Modification When one of FO to 2047 FO to 2047 for AuA and Anv is turned on by SET F 1 is added to the contents of SD63 When RST F or LEDR d instruction is executed 1 is subtracted from the Annunciator 8 Annunciator contents of SD63 If the INDICATOR RESET switch D9124 D1124 detection 7 8 i R u ntit detection quantity is provided to the CPU pressing the switch can a y execute the same processing Quantity which has been turned on by SET F is stored into SD63 in BIN code The value of SD63 is maximum 8 SD1125 When any of FO to 2047 is turned ON by SET F F numbers turned ON sequentially are registered into D9125 D9132 F numters turned OFF by RSTF are deleted from SD1126 D9125 D9132 and move to data registers subsequent to the ones that stored deleted F numbers Execution of instruction shifts up SD64 SD71 contents one place When CPU has SD1127 INDICATOR RESET switch pressing that switch performs the same processing When there are eight EH detection number 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 number D1129 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8 ea 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 25 99 99 99 SD1130 15115 15 70 70 65 D1131
144. Riga Phone 371 784 22 80 Fax 371 784 22 81 e mail utu utu lv UAB UTU POWEL Savanoriu pr 187 LT 2053 Vilnius Phone 370 0 52323 101 Fax 370 0 52322 980 e mail powel utu It INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA REPUBLIC OF Cuza Voda 36 1 81 MD 2061 Chisinau Phone 373 0 2 562 263 Fax 373 0 2 562 263 e mail intehsis mdl net IRELAND LITHUANIA Getronics b v NETHERLANDS Control Systems Donauweg 2 B NL 1043 AJ Amsterdam Phone 31 0 20 587 67 00 Fax 31 0 20 587 68 39 e mail info gia getronics com NORWAY Beijer Electronics AS Teglverksveien 1 N 3002 Drammen Phone 47 0 32 24 30 00 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 e mail info beijer no MPL Technology Sp z o o POLAND ul Sliczna 36 PL 31 444 Krak w Phone 48 0 12 632 28 85 Fax 48 0 12 632 47 82 e mail krakow mpl pl Sirius Trading amp Services srl ROMANIA Bd Lacul Tei nr 1 B RO 72301 Bucuresti 2 Phone 40 0 21 201 7147 Fax 40 0 21 201 7148 e mail sirius_t_s fx ro ACP Autocomp a s SLOVAKIA Chalupkova 7 SK 81109 Bratislava Phone 421 02 5292 22 54 55 Fax 421 02 5292 22 48 e mail info acp autocomp sk PROVENDOR OY FINLAND NEA d o o SLOVENIA Telj nkatu 8 A 3 Stegne 11 FIN 28130 Pori SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 358 0 2 522 3300 Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 Fax 358 0 2 522 3322 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 e mail e mail inea inea
145. SM1242 H Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line error ON Abnormal OFF Loopback not being i k h M9243 SM1243 bint AEN conducted GE sa whether or not loopback is occurring at the P ON Loopback implementation f M9246 SM1246 Data not received OFF Reception Depends on whether or not data has been received from ON No reception the master station f OFF Reception Depends on whether or not a tier three station has DE allen ES Data Ngt regeived ON _ No reception received data from its master station in a three tier system Parameters not OFF Reception Depends on whether or not link parameters have been M9250 SM1250 P S received ON No reception received from the master station SM1251 Link relay OFF Normal Depands on the data link condition at the local station ON Abnormal OFF Not being executed SM1252 Loop test status ON Forward or reverse loop test execution underway OFF RUN or STEP RUN SM1253 status operation status ON STOP or PAUSE status or PAUSE mode Local station other than host GEES Depends on whether or not a local station other than the aes station operation status host is in STOP or PAUSE mode H ON STOP or PAUSE status i status OFF No errors Depends on whether or not a local station has detected an ON Error detection error in another station OFF No errors Depends on whether or not a local or a remote I O station ON Error detection has detected any link parameter error
146. Seconds 0 to sai to to Common information category codes The common information category codes store the following codes 0 No error Unit module No PLC No Base No File name Drive name Time value set Program error location Switch cause for Q4AR only For a multiple PLC system the module number or PLC number is stored depending on the error that occurred Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has been stored PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 information category code information categories The individual information category codes store the following codes 0 No error 1 Open 2 File name Drive name 3 Time value actually measured 4 Program error location 5 Parameter number 6 Annunciator number 7 Check instruction malfunction number D f S Error 9008 format change New O Rem New 11 65 11 65 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding s Explanation ACPU E po TT Common information corresponding to the error codes SDO is stored here The following five types of information are stored here Slot No Number Meaning SD5 Slot No PLC No Base No 1 2 SD6 VO No SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 Vacant SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 1 For a multiple PLC system the slot number or PLC number is stored depending on the error that occurred Slot 0 in the multiple
147. Sege race preparation OFF Not ready Sampling trace JON Ready i R S Status Goes ON when sampling trace is ready New preparation change E Trace started when this goes ON Man OFF Suspend e Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF Ge Sale Sampling trace ON Start Sampling trace started when this goes ON U M9047 QnA start e Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF race execution Switches ON during execution of trace S Status M9046 QCPU in progress change s OFF Suspend SM802 Sampling trace ON Start S Status execution in i Goes ON during execution of sampling trace change M9046 QnA progress g Meaning Explanation R e Trace is triggered when this relay switches from OFF to Trace trigger ON Identical to TRACE instruction execution status U Maot are SM803 EE OFF gt ON Start e Sampling trace trigger goes ON when this goes from ping OFF to ON Identical to STRA instruction execution U M9044 QnA trigger status RE S Status Sisia After trace trigger OFF Not after trigger Switches ON after trace is triggered change QCPU i ON After trigger Aftor sampling 99 Goes ON after sampling trace trigger SEN New QnA trace trigger change Trace completed e Switches ON at completion of trace SES 9043 QCPU SM805 P OFF Not completed H i change i N E Sampling trace O na Goes ON at completion of sampling trace SE 9043 QnA completed change 11 50 11 50 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Specia
148. TION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q Performance Specifications continued EE E Internal relay M Default 8192 points MO to 8191 Latch relay L Default 8192 points LO to 8191 Link relay B Default 8192points BO to 1FFF Default 2048 points TO to 2047 for low high speed timer Select between low high speed timer by instructions i The measurement unit of the low high speed timer is set with Timer T parameters Low speed timer 1 to 1000ms 1ms unit default 100ms High speed timer 0 1 to 100ms 0 1ms unit default 10ms Default 0 point for low high speed retentive timer Switchover between the low high speed retentive timer is set by instructions Retentive timer ST The measurement unit of the low high speed retentive timer is set with Us set with parameters parameters Low speed retentive timer 1 to 1000ms 1ms unit default 100ms 4 High speed retentive timer 0 1 to 100ms 0 1ms unit default 10ms Comer Normal counter default 1024 points CO to 1023 Counter C e Interrupt counter maximum 256 points default 0 point set with parameters e When a standard RAM is used 32768 points RO to 32767 The number of points of up to 65536 points can be used by block conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 Q12HCPU Q25HCPU The number of points of up to 131072 points can be used by block conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 e When a SRAM card 1Mbyte is used
149. The wrong drive was specified Check the setting contents and make a correction 40B1H The specified program does not exist Check the specified file name and make a correction SFC file related The specified program was not an SFC te yg i 40B2H bror program Check the specified file name and make a correction There was an SFC dedicated instruction in the d 40B3xH write during run area Check the setting contents and make a correction Increase the free space of the specified drive 41D0u The route directory has no free space Optimize the specified drive to increase continuous free areas 204 The file pointer is insufficient Specify the correct file pointer gain A1 Du hange the file name The file pointer is insufficient The file of the same name exists Cancel the write protection of the disk and execute 41E0u The drive does not respond heck for the specified drive If it exists check its status 41E4y The file cannot be accessed properly Execute again after resetting the CPU module At the time of file access time out occurred 41E9H G Execute again after some time File related during waiting for access e disk is logically broken 41EB rors The path name is too long heck the length of the path name 41ECH Change the specified drive An attempt to make a file continuous failed ae D Optimize the specified drive to increase continuous free 41EDx There are enough free file areas which cannot E be
150. WN error code 7000 LC No 1 normal Goes OFF when the PLC No 1 is normal including a LC No 1 during si continuation error Comes ON when the PLC No 1 is during a stop error LC No 2 normal Goes OFF when the PLC No 2 is normal including a LC No 2 during s continuation error e Comes ON when the PLC No 2 is during a stop error LC No 3 normal Goes OFF when the PLC No 3 is normal including a LC No 3 during s continuation error Comes ON when the PLC No 3 is during a stop error LC No 4 normal Goes OFF when the PLC No 4 is normal including a 4 during s continuation error error e Comes ON when the PLC No 4 is during a stop error No 2 CPU reset 2 reset cancel flag S 2 resetting No 3 CPU reset i 3 reset cancel flag 3 3 resetting No 4 CPU reset 4 reset cancel flag 4 resetting No 1 CPU error flag No 2 CPU error flag No 3 CPU error flag No 4 CPU error flag 11 44 11 44 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued Explanation When Set Max loaded I O OFF Ignored e When this relay goes from OFF to ON maximum loaded SM259 ON Read VO number is read to SD250 K New seus OFF No replacement VO change flag ON Replacement All stations OFF Refresh arrival station refresh command VON Refresh all stations OFF Operative network MELSECNET 10 ON Standby network module 1 information OFF W
151. a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSEC System Q Programmable Logic Controllers User s Manual High Performance Model QCPU QO2CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONS a Read these precautions before using When using Mitsubishi equipment thoroughly read this manual and the associated manuals introduced in this manual Also pay careful attention to safety and handle the module properly These SAFETY PRECAUTIONS classify the safety precautions into two categories DANGER and CAUTION 7 s 1 D DANGER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage N A Depending on circumstances procedures indicated by P CAUTION may also be linked to serious results In any case it is important to follow the directions for usage Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER Install a safety circuit external to the PLC that keeps the entire system safe even when there are problems with the external power supply or the PLC module Otherwise trouble could result from erroneous output or erroneous operation 1 Outside the PLC con
152. ace Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage status usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure
153. age drop to the minimum use the thickest wires possible maximum 2mm d Do not bundle the 100VAC and 24VDC wires with or run them close to the main circuit high voltage large current and I O signal lines Reserve a distance of at least 100 mm from adjacent wires e AS a countermeasure to power surge due to lightening connect a surge absorber for lightening as shown below 1 Separate the ground of the surge absorber for lightening E1 from that of the PLC E2 2 Select a surge absorber for lightening whose power supply voltage does no exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage even at the time of maximum power supply voltage elevation 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 2 2 MELSEC Q 2 Wiring of I O equipment a Insulation sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used with the terminal block It is recommended to cover the wire connections of the crimping terminals with mark or insulation tubes b The wires used for connection to the terminal block should be 0 3 to 0 75mm in core and 2 8mm 0 11 inch max in outside diameter c Run the input and output lines away from each other d When the wiring cannot be run away from the main circuit and power lines use a batch shielded cable and ground it on the PLC side In some cases ground it in the opposite side PLC Shielded cable Input Output e Where wiring runs through piping ground the piping without fail f Run
154. al for the CC Link Master Local module b When the AnS series special function modules shown below are used a limitation is given to an accessible device range e A1SJ71J92 S3 type JEMANET interface module e A1SD51S type intelligent communication Accessible device range Input X Output Y X Y0 to 7FF Internal relay M SE relay L MO to 8191 Link relay B BO to FFF Timer STO to 2087 Counter cc Eise DO to 6143 Link register w WO to FFF Annunciator F FO to 2047 c A graphic operation terminal can be used only for the GOT900 series Basic OS matching Q mode and communication driver must be installed The GOT800 series A77GOT and A64GOT cannot be used 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q d The modules shown below cannot be used Module Name MELSECNET 10 network A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 A1SJ71QLP21 module A1SJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QLP21GE A1SJ71QBR11 MELSECNET Il B data link S II RE A1SJ71AP21 A1SJ71AR21 A1SJ71AT21B moauie A1SJ71QE71 B2 S3 B5 S3 Ethernet interface module A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 B5 S3 Serial communication module i A1SJ71QC24 N A1SJ71UC24 R2 R4 PRF computer link module CC Link master local module A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 Modem interface module A1SJ71CMO S3 ME NET interface module A1SJ71ME81 e A dedicated instruction for the next module which was present in the QnA A series program instruction cannot be used for the High Performance model QCPU R
155. al for the respective device 1 When the base unit is of Q3OB or Q60B Power supply module Base unit Ee GE Q35B Q65B etc Peripheral devices converter CPU module zi cables etc for connection SOCCER GOGHOR Un GtG between CPU module and PC __ VO module QX10 QY10 etc __ Intelligent function module Q64AD QU71LP21 25 etc x1 The CPU module is loaded on the Q3OB main base unit a Selection of power supply module for use of Q52B or Q55B extension base unit Using the Q52B or Q55B supplies 5VDC power from the power supply module of the main base unit through the extension cable Therefore note the following when using the Q52B or Q55B 1 The power supply module to be loaded on the main base unit should be selected to cover also the 5VDC used on the Q52B or Q55B For example either of the following power supply modules must be mounted on the main base unit when the current consumption on the main base unit is 3A and that on the Q52B or Q55B is 1A 5VDC Rated output current 6A Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q63P 8 5A Q64P 2 Since 5VDC is supplied to the Q52B or Q55B through the extension cable a voltage drop occurs at the extension cable You must select the power supply module and extension cable length to ensure that the IN connector voltage of the Q52B or Q55B is 4 75VDC or more For details of a voltage drop refer to Section 6 6 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q
156. al or remote station number at which a forward or reverse loop error has occurred Device Bit number 515 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 FIR F RIF L R7 LIR6 FIR F IRF 16 L R15 L R14 FIR F RIF L R22 FlR F RIF L R30 F RIF L R38 F R F R F L R46 FIR F RIF LIR54 FIR FIR F D1232 D1233 D1234 D1235 FIR D1236 D1237 D1238 D1239 In the above table F indicates a forward loop line and R a reverse loop line The bit corresponding to the station number at which the forward or reverse loop error has occurred becomes 1 Example When the forward loop line of station 5 has an error bit 8 of SD1232 become 1 and when D1232 is monitored its value is 256 100 Stores the number of times the following transmission errors have been detected CRC OVER AB IF Count is made to a maximum of FFFFxu RESET to return the count to 0 Stores whether the slave station corresponds to MELSECNET or MELSECNET II e Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET II stations become 1 e Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET stations or unconnected become 0 Device Bit number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 bi D1202 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L2 SD1203 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L18 SD1241 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42
157. alue of scan time is stored into SD520 in BIN code D9018 SD1018 SD524 See Scan ume Scan time is stored in BIN code at each END and 10 ms units always rewritten 11 88 11 88 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification Constant scan D1020 D1021 D1022 SD412 D1025 D1026 D1027 1 second counter D9019 D9020 D9021 D9022 D9025 D9026 D9027 D9028 psoas eme 035 D9036 SD1036 Extension file registerfor designation of device number D9037 SD1037 D9038 SD1038 SD207 LED display D9039 SD1039 SD208 priority ranking 11 89 Clock data Clock data Clock data SD1028 Clock data SD648 Extension file Use block No Stores the block No of the extension file register register being used in BCD code Constant scan time User sets in 10 ms units a A time a A ms units Count in units of 1sec Clock data year month Clock data day hour Clock data minute second Clock data day of week Device number when individual devices from extension file register are directly accessed Priorities 1 to 4 Priorities 5 to 7 Corresponding D1019 SD526 Scan time Maximum scan time 10 ms units If scan time is larger than the content of SD526 the value is newly stored at each END Namely the maximum value of scan time is stored into SD526 in B
158. am or peripheral device SIE VO change flag ON No replacement test mode to change the module during CPU RUN To be switched on in peripheral device test mode to change the module during CPU STOP e RUN STOP mode must not be changed until UO module change is complete Presence abseng OFF SFC programs not used Turned on if the SFC program is registered and turned SM1100 SM320 e of SFC e ON SFC programs used off if it is not program e Should be turned on by the program if the SFC program SM1101 SM321 Start stop SFC OFF SFC programs stop is to be started If turned off operation output of the program ON SFC programs start execution step is turned off and the SFC program is stopped e Selects the starting step when the SFC program is restarted using SM322 ON Al execution conditions when the SFC program stopped are cleared and the program is started S with the initial step of block 0 SM1102 ees SFC program ET Initial Start OFF Started with the step of the block being executed start status ON Continue when the program stopped Once turned on the program is latched in the system and remains on even if the power is turned off Should be turned off by the sequence program when turning on the power or when starting with the initial step of block 0 F Selects consecutive or step by step transfer of steps of Presence absenc Pee Ee transition not which transfer conditions are established when all of the M9103
159. ame The extension instruction designated by the program has an incorrect number of devices 4004 The extension instruction designated by the program a device which cannot be used 4010 There is no END FEND instruction in the program 4020 The total number of internal file pointers used by the program f exceeds the number of internal file pointers set in the parameters Read the common error information at a peripheral device check F arr 8 error step corresponding to its numerical value program error 4021 The common pointer numbers used by individual files overlap location and correct the problem 4030 The allocation pointer numbers used by individual files are overlap 4100 The instruction cannot process the contained data The designated device number for data processed by the instruction Read the common error information at a peripheral device check Read the common error information at a peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem exceeds the usable range Alternatively the stored data or constants for the devices designated by the instruction exceeds the usable range 4101 In a multiple CPU system the link direct device LGT was specified for the network module under control of another station The network number and station number designated with a dedicated network instruction are not correct The link direct devi
160. aracter 7th character power loss power loss 1st character of SD905 extension 2EH 3rd character of SD906 extension 2nd character of extension SD910 Stored in sequence that PU key code was entered B8 B7 to BO 1st character 3rd character 5th character n n n n n n n g g g g g g g fo kd a ES CA N 7th character 9th character 11th character 13th character 15th character 17th character 19th character 21st character 23rd character 25th character 27th character 29th character 31st character SD911 B15 to SD912 SD910 2nd character D913 SD911 4th character SD912 6th character SD914 SD913 8th character SD915 SD914 10th character SD915 12th character SD916 14th character RKEY input RKEY input D917 16th character SD918 18th character SD919 20th character SD920 22nd character SD921 24th character SD922 26th character e character SD925 32nd character MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU po TT Corresponding CPU S Status change S Status change QnA S During New execution 11 85 11 85 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN E MELSEC Q 9 A to Q QnA conversion correspondences ACPU special registers D9000 to D9255 correspond to the special registers SD1000 to D1255 after A series to the Q QnA series conversi
161. arameter is different from that of the actually mounted network The network class specified by a parameter is different from that of the actually mounted network The network refresh parameter of the MELSECNET 10 H is out of the specified area 3102 An error was discovered when the network parameter check was made at the network module In a multiple CPU system the Q series Ethernet interface module under control of another station is specified as the first O number of the Ethernet setting parameter Though the number of Ethernet module is set to one or more in the parameter the actually mounted number of units is zero _ The head I O number for the Ethernet module set parameter is 3103 different from that of the actually mounted module AJ71QE71 does not exist in the position of I O number set by the parameter EE O number designation is overlapping Numbers of the parameter and loaded AJ71QE71 are different Ethernet parameter dedicated instruction is set to more than 5 Ethernet and MELSECNET 10 use the same network number Network number station number or group number set by the parameter is out of range O number is out of ra ge In a multiple CPU system the Q series CC Link module under control of another station is specified as the first O number of the CC Link setting parameter 1 Though the number of CC Link module set in the network parameters is one or more the actually mounted number of
162. are installed correctly After installation check them for looseness Poor connections could cause an input or output failure Securely load the memory card by pushing it into the memory card loading slot Check for insecure loading after loading the memory card Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault Completely turn off the external power supply before loading or unloading the module Not doing so could result in electric shock or damage to the product Do not directly touch the module s conductive parts or electronic components Touching the conductive parts could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module This section gives instructions for handling the CPU I O intelligent function and power supply modules base units and so on 1 Module enclosure terminal block connectors and pin connectors are made of resin do not drop them or subject them to strong impact 2 Do not remove modules printed circuit boards from the enclosure in order to avoid changes in operation 3 Tighten the module fixing screws and terminal block screws within the tightening torque range specified below Location of Screw Tightening Torque Range Module fixing screw M3 X 12 screw 36 to 48 N cm UO module terminal block screw M3 screw 42 to 58 N cm UO module terminal block fixing screw M3 5 screw 66 to 89 N cm Power supply module terminal screw M3 5 screw 66 to 89 N cm 4 Be sure to install th
163. ared when all contents of SD1100 to SD1107 are reset to 0 e Fuse blow check is executed also to the output modules of remote I O stations e Stores the module numbers corresponding to setting switch numbers or base unit slot numbers when fuse blow occurred UO module for A0J2 Extension base unit Setti B it S ms Stored data niet Stored data switch slot No Number of Fuse blown module with blown fuse e For remote I O station value of module I O number 10H 1 is stored D9001 D1001 11 86 11 86 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Ee MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Conversion Conversion Modification D9002 SD1002 D9004 SD1004 UO module UO module 4 ieee verification error verification error module number MINI link master Error detection module errors Number of times for AC DOWN Corresponding CPU Details e UO modules of which data are different from data entered are detected when the power is turned on the first UO number of the lowest number unit among the detected units is stored in hexadecimal Storing method is the same as that of SD1000 To monitor the number by peripheral devices perform monitor operation given in hexadecimal Cleared when all contents of SD1116 to SD1123 are reset to 0 e I O module verify check is executed also to the modules of remote I O terminals e Stores the MINI S3 l
164. ater are used In addition to the remote password there are the following protection facilities for the High Performance model QCPU a Protection of the whole CPU module by making system protection settings of the High Performance model QCPU b Protection of the memory card by setting the write protect switch of the memory card c File by file protection using password e The MELSECNET H remote I O network facility can be executed when the MELSECNET H network module of function version B and GX Developer Version 6 or later are used 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM This section describes the system configuration of the High Performance model QCPU cautions on use of the system and configured equipment 2 1 System Configuration P The outline of the equipment configuration configuration with peripheral devices and system configuration in the High Performance model QCPU system is described below 1 Equipment configuration a If the main base unit Q3OB is used Memory card 1 Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA High Performance model QOPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Battery Q6BAT E D Power supply module UO module Intelligent function
165. ation stage 1 Faulty CPU is loaded in a multiple CPU system 7010 power on This error occurs at only the station which was reset 2 High Performance model QCPU of function version A is loaded An error is detected at the High Performance model QCPU of n a multiple CPU system a PLC fault occurred at a station where all station stop by stop error of PLC was not selected in the 7020 operation mode The error is detected at the High Performance model QCPU of function version B in a multiple CPU system configuration other than the station where the CPU module fault occurred 9000 Annunciator F was set ON 9010 Error detected by the CHK instruction Storage of data onto ROM was completed normally in automatic 9020 write to standard ROM BOOT LED also flickers 10000 In the multiple CPU system an error occurred in the CPU module other than the Process CPU High Performance model QCPU 3 In a multiple CPU system any of stations 2 to 4 was reset during Check the standby system condition Because this is a bus switching module hardware error contact our nearest Mitsubishi representative Check the remote I O network setting 1 Read the error individual information at a peripheral device check the error of the PLC resulting in CPU module fault and remove the error Remove the High Performance model QCPU of function version A from the main base unit Read the error individual information at a peripheral device
166. attern in units of 16 points indicating the modules whose fuses have blown D9103 D1103 Fuse blown module D9104 D1104 D9105 D1105 D9106 D1106 D9107 D1107 D9108 D1108 D9109 D1109 D9110 D1110 Step transfer Timer setting valve monitoring timer Land the F number setting at time out D9111 D1111 D9112 D1112 D9113 D1113 D9114 D1114 D9116 D1116 D9117 D1117 D9118 D1118 Bit pattern in units of 16 points indicating the modules with verification errors D9119 D1119 VO module verification error D1120 D1121 D1122 D1123 ee Been VE 11 91 Sets the time check time of the data link instructions ZNRD ZNWR for the MELSECNET 10 Setting range 1 s to 65535 s 1 to 65535 e Setting unit s e Default value 10 s If O has been set default 10 s is applied For details refer to the manual of each microcomputer program package Detailed error Self diagnosis Stores the detail code of cause of an instruction error code detailed error code Stores upper 2 digits of the head I O address of I O modules to be loaded or unloaded during online mode in BIN code Example Input module X2FO H2F Output module numbers in units of 16 points of which fuses have blown are entered in bit pattern Preset output unit numbers when parameter setting has been performed 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 sD1100 o0o olol4flo olol4 lololo kcoj 80
167. be extinguished when the ON and OFF output power is turned OFF Abnormal if the LED does not turn ON or turn OFF as indicated above Input LED Module indication LED 10 10 2 10 2 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 2 Periodic Inspection The items that must be inspected one or two times every 6 months to 1 year are listed below When the equipment is moved or modified or layout of the wiring is changed also perform this inspection Periodic Inspection Inspection Item Judgment Criteria Ambient temperature When the sequencer is Measure with a thermometer used in the board the Ambient humidity and a hygrometer 5 to 95 RH 1 ambient temperature in Measure corrosive gas the board becomes the i ambient temperature Corrosive gas must not be present Measure a voltage across the 85 to 132VAC Chandethe bower Power voltage terminals of 100 200VAC and 170to264VAC s 7 H 24VDC 15 60 i UDE IT Further tighten screws Move the module to check for The module must be installed If the CPU I O or power looseness and rattling fixedly supply module is loose fix it with screws Ambient environment Looseness rattling S s Es A D Adhesion of dirt and foreign matter Looseness of Try to further tighten screws Screws must not be loose Screws must not be loose Get belooes Further tighten rther Further tighten terminal screws with a screwdriver Pro
168. c 5 VDC circuit of each module 2 Power consumption of a total of 5 VDC logic section of each module The power consumption of the 5 VDC output circuit section of the power supply module is the power consumption of each module including the current consumption of the base unit Wsv Isv x 5 W 3 A total of 24 VDC average power consumption of the output module power consumption for simultaneous ON points The average power of the external 24 VDC power is the total power consumption of each module Waav l24V x 24 W 4 Average power consumption due to voltage drop in the output section of the output module Power consumption for simultaneous ON points WOUT IOUT x Vdrop x Number of outputs x Simultaneous ON rate W loUT Output current Current in actual use A Vdrop Voltage drop in each output module V 5 Average power consumption of the input section of the input module Power consumption for simultaneous ON points WIN IIN xX E X Number of input points x Simultaneous ON rate W IN Input current Effective value for AC A E Input voltage Voltage in actual use V 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 6 Power consumption of the power supply section of the intelligent function module WS I5V x 5 l24v x 24 hoov x 100 W The total of the power consumption values calculated for each block becomes the power consumption of the overall sequencer system W Wew W5v W24V WOUT WIN Ws
169. c Idee gt E gt D D ot oO oO O12 o D oO D D D D 3 2 E ole a a o 2 o a a a a Ro E 2 E RER of oi oa af 2 al al al g fo 2 BEZ 5 c E Epo E E E Cc Cc Cc Ke kel Er o lo 3 3 3 gt x o IG o 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 oy P o Q a a a Co Co Co Co Co a Co a D 2 x o ls g 8 ol g lt olg jas Ss 2 Z 2 Q a 2 Z Z Bi a D O Cc Oo Oo EA b Q oO O oO Q Q ke D x ES e Solo 2 ajl bei D ke ko fe bei Ss E ka E Z o o e x o o x x bei D ajo Q Ei fo ae fo 3 2 ol at D O o D O Ei S bg 2 D bg oO a 2 a 2 Ke 5 App 5 App 5 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Error dai gt code Error Error description Countermeasure hexadecimal item A block No outside the range was specified Check the setting contents and make a correction Se OF bl cksithat exceeds the range was Check the number of settings and make a correction A step No that is outside the range was Check the setting contents and make a correction specified SFC device specification Aue of steps that exceeds the range was Check the number of settings and make a correction error Se STEP No outside the Tange was Check the setting contents and make a correction The specified device was outside the range Check the number of settings and make a correction heres mistake in ihe meek Specification Check the setting contents and make a correction pattern or the step specification pattern 40B0u
170. cation Off Flicker Stop When instruction is executed 4223 4230 INST FORMAT ERR Program error location Off Flicker When instruction is executed 4231 Stop 4300 Stop EXTEND INST ERR Program error location Off On Flicker On continue When instruction is executed 4301 2 4400 SECH CODE ERROR Program error location TC Of Flicker_ Sep STOP RUN 4411 4420 A 4235 N CAN T SET S Program error location Off Flicker Stop STOP RUN Program error location Flicker Stop STOP RUN 4504 4600 Stop 4601 SFCP OPE ERROR Program error location Flicker On Continue When instruction is executed 4602 2 4610 SFCP EXE ERROR Program error location On Continue STOP RUN 4611 4620 Flicker Stop When instruction is executed STEP EXE ERROR Program error location EX When instruction is executed 4422 4500 4501 4502 4503 SFCP FORMAT ERR BLOCK EXE ERROR Program error location 4621 4630 4631 D 63 4633 5000 5001 5010 measured 5011 coo pu mee Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 1 2 The CPU module operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 5 Can only be detected in the standby system of a redundant system WDT ERROR Time value set ler ee Off Flicker Stop Always PRG TIME OVER Time va
171. ce J W 1 1 is not set correctly e The module No network No character string count specified by the extension instruction is outside the setting range e The character string specified by the extension instruction is unusable 4103 4107 one CPU module Numbers of execution to the CC Link instruction are beyond 64 4108 With high speed interrupt setting execute PR PRC UDCNT1 2 PWM SPD PLOADP PUNLOADP PAWPP instruction 4109 No NEXT instruction was executed following the execution of a FOR instruction Alternatively there are fewer NEXT instructions than FOR instructions A NEXT instruction was executed although no FOR instruction has been executed Alternatively there are more NEXT instructions than FOR instructions 4200 4201 The configuration of the PID dedicated instruction is incorrect 33 or more multiple CPU dedicated instructions were executed from The CC Link parameter is not set when the CC Link instruction is executed error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem 1 Delete from the program the link direct device which specifies the network module under control of another station 2 Using the link direct device specify the network module under control of the host station Read the common error information at a peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the
172. ce module QJ71C24 R2 or Q series Ethernet interface module of function version A QJ71C24 R2 or Q series Ethernet interface module of function version B under control of another station is specified in a multiple CPU system 4000 The program contains an instruction code that cannot be decoded Change the file register file for the one which allows refresh in the whole range 1 Delete the automatic refresh setting or similar parameter setting of the intelligent function module under control of another station 2 Change the setting to the automatic refresh setting or similar parameter setting of the intelligent function module under control of the host station hange the first UO number of the target module to within the Ox to OFFOu range QCPU function Ver B or later function version B in the position specified as the first I O number of the remote password file hange the setting to the QU71024 R2 or Q series Ethernet interface module of function version B under control of the host station 2 Delete the remote password setting An unusable instruction is included in the program The program contains a dedicated instruction for SFC program Read the common error information at a peripheral device check although it is not an SFC program error step corresponding to its numerical value program error The extension instruction designated by the program has an location and correct the problem incorrect instruction n
173. ch is returned automatically from RELEASE to LOCK when the battery holder is disconnected 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 5 Memory Card Loading Unloading Procedures 1 To install the memory card Install the memory card into the CPU module while paying attention to the orientation of the memory card Insert the memory card securely into the connector until the height of the memory card reaches that of the memory card EJECT button Memory card EJECT button CPU Memory card module Insert it in this Precautions direction on this side 2 To remove the memory card To remove the memory card from the CPU module press the memory card EJECT button to push out the card Memory card EJECT button lt q Duch Memory card CPU module Remove the card in this direction H 3 To extract the memory card while the power is turned on Before removing the memory card make sure that the special relays SM604 SM605 are OFF e When SM604 is ON the memory card cannot be removed since the CPU module is using the memory card e When SM605 is ON turn it OFF When SM604 and SM605 are OFF remove the memory card in the following procedure 1 Turn on the special relay SM609 using the sequence program or by the device test of GX Developer etc 2 By monitoring GX Developer etc check that the special relays SM600 is turned off 3 Extract the memory card SM600 Memory
174. ck 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 7 Note the following points when mounting a DIN rail Mounting a DIN rail needs special adaptors optional which are to be user prepared a Applicable adaptor types For Q38B Q312B Q68B Q612B Q6DIN1 For Q35B Q65B Q6DIN2 For Q33B Q52B Q55B Q63B Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Q6DIN3 b Adaptor installation method The way to install the adaptors for mounting a DIN rail to the base unit is given below Base unit rear O EZ EH j o i OO Seats Place the hook of the adaptor Push the top of the adaptor small in the lower hole small far enough until it clicks Insert the adaptor large into the grooves Push the bottom of the adaptor large far of the base unit from below enough until it clicks c Applicable DIN rail types JIS C 2812 TH35 7 5Fe TH35 7 5Al TH35 15Fe d DIN rail mounting screw intervals When using a TH35 7 5Fe or TH35 7 5Al DIN rail rail mounting screws should be tightened at a pitch of 200 mm 7 88 inch or less in order to ensure that the rail has sufficient strength DIN rail DIN rail mounting screw b 35mm 1 38 inch _ P 200mm 7 88 inch or less 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 3 2 Instructions for mounting the base unit When mounting the PLC to an enclosure or similar fully consider its operability maintainability and environmental resistance
175. cker 3001 3002 When an END instruction is PARAMETER ERROR File name drive name executed Parameter number Off Flicker 3003 At power ON Reset PARAMETER ERROR File name STOP _ RUN Parameter number Off Flicker At power ON Reset STOP RUN Off g File name drive name Parameter number SE SC 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x 2 The CPU module operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 3004 PARAMETER ERROR File name Parameter number Flicker 3006 PARAMETER ERROR File name Parameter number 3009 3010 3012 PARAMETER ERROR 3013 11 27 11 27 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres Error Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action ponding SDO x 1 CPU 1 Check and correct the parameters boot setting QCPU Program memory capacity was exceeded by performing boot 2 Delete unnecessary files in the program memory function operation or automatic write to standard ROM 3 Choose Clear program memory for boot in the parameter so Ver B that boot is started after the program memory is cleared or later Read the error individual information at the peripheral device check The file designated at the parameter PLC RAS settings fault history io be sure that the parameter drive name and file name correspond area has not been
176. correct if necessary 2501 There are multiple program files although none has been set at Edit the parameter program setting to yes the parameter program settings Alternatively delete unneeded programs 2502 The program file is incorrect Check whether the program version is gt QPG and check the Alternatively the file contents are not those of a sequence program jfile contents to be sure they are for a sequence program There are no program files at all Check program configuration 2504 ee SFC normal programs or control programs have been Check parameters and program configuration In a multiple CPU system the intelligent function module under 1 Specify the first I O number of the intelligent function module control of another station is specified in the interrupt pointer setting under control of the host station of the parameter 2 Delete the interrupt pointer setting of the parameter The parameter settings for timer time limit setting the RUN PAUSE Deg F contact the common pointer number the general data processing 1 Read the error detailed information at the peripheral device f i i check the parameter items corresponding to the numerical eth vacan sos by Poeun Are outside thie values parameter numbers there and correct when necessary 2 If the error is still generated following the correction of the 2001 Parameter contents have been destroyed parameter settings it is likely that there is a memory error
177. could cause an input or output failure Securely load the memory card into the memory card loading connector After loading check for lifting Lifting can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault Completely turn off the external power supply before loading or unloading the module Not doing so could result in electric shock or damage to the product Do not directly touch the module s conductive parts or electronic components Touching the conductive parts could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER Completely turn off the external power supply when installing or placing wiring Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product When turning on the power supply or operating the module after installation or wiring work be sure that the module s terminal covers are correctly attached Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Be sure to ground the FG terminals and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor Not doing so could result in electric shock or erroneous operation When wiring in the PLC be sure that it is done correctly by checking the product s rated voltage and the terminal layout Connecting a power supply that is different from the rating or incorrectly wiring the product could result in fire or damage External connections shall be crimped
178. d this flag is always OFF because memory card B is used as standard memory e Same configuration as SD51 above Bit pattern e Subsequently goes OFF when battery voltage is restored to indicating where normal battery voltage drop When High Performance model QCPU is used this flag is occurred always OFF because memory card B is used as standard memory SD52 Battery low AC DC e Every time the input voltage falls to or below 85 AC Number of times for power 65 DC power of the rating during calculation of the DOWN AC DC DOWN CPU module the value is incremented by 1 and stored in BIN S Error D9005 O Rem detection code The relevant station bit goes ON when any of the Installed MINI S3 X n 0 X n 20 X n 6 n 26 X n 7 n 27 or X n 8 X n 28 goes ON Goes ON when communications between the installed M MINI link Error detection S3 and the CPU are not possible D9004 format QnA errors state B15 B9B8 BO change 8th 1st 8th 1st module module module module 4 ka gt Information on Information on Error D Blown fuse Number of module Value stored here is the lowest station I O number of the module s D9000 60 number with blown fuse with the blown fuse WO module I O module O Rem pe verification _ vertfication error The lowest UO number of the module where the I O module D9002 verification number took place error number module number S D62 Annu ciato
179. d ROM You need not use GX Developer to write parameters programs on a memory card to the standard ROM of the High Performance model QCPU When the standard ROM is used to perform ROM operation you can load a memory card into the High Performance model QCPU and write parameters programs on the memory card to the standard ROM Hence you need not carry GX Developer personal computer to rewrite the parameters programs 10 External I O can be turned ON OFF forcibly If the High Performance model QCPU is in the RUN mode you can operate GX Developer to turn external inputs outputs ON OFF forcibly independently of the program execution status You need not put the High Performance model QCPU in the STOP mode to perform wiring operation tests by forced ON OFF of outputs 11 Remote password can be set When access to an Ethernet module or serial communication module is made externally whether access to the High Performance model QCPU can be made or not can be selected with a remote password 12 Remote I O network of MELSECNET H can be configured You can load the remote master station of the MELSECNET H to configure an MELSECNET H remote I O system e Features 9 to 12 are functions added to the High Performance model QCPU whose serial number is 02092 or later in its upper 5 digits e The remote password facility can be executed when the Ethernet module or serial communication module of function version B and GX Developer Version 6 or l
180. d by SD550 is read to SD551 to SD552 Reads module OFF Ignored service interval ON Read 5 Memory cards SE ett Se Memory card OFF Unusable ae l SM600 usable flags ON Use enabled ON when memory card is ready for use by user S Initial SM601 Memory card OFF bel deg Goes ON when memory card protect switch is ON S Initial protect flag ON Protect SM602 Drive 1 flag OFE No orive Goes ON when loaded memory card is RAM S Initial ON Drive 1 present SM603 Drive 2 flag OFF No qrive 2 Goes ON when loaded memory card is ROM S Initial ON Drive 2 present Mey carg OFF Neue Goes ON when memory card is in use S Initial in use flag ON In use Memory card OFF Remove insert enabled remove insert ON Remove insert prohibit flag prohibited Memory card OFF Remove insert ee user to enable the removal insertion of i a l H removeinsert prohibited e Turned OFF by the system after the memory card is us ad enable flag ON Remove insert enabled removed Always ON Memory card B OFF Unusable usable flags ON Use enabled ON when memory card B is ready for use by user S Initial New Always ON New QCPU Citi nit iti Memory cardB OFF No protect protect flag ON Protect Goes ON when memory card B protect switch is ON Initial New iti nit iti on Q O E Goes ON when memory card cannot be inserted or removed d S Always ON New QCPU Drive 3 fla OFF No drive 3
181. data replace the SRAM card battery with the PLC power supply ON and the SRAM card installed b Start replacement after backing up the CPU module data using GX Developer c Since replacement is made with the PLC power supply ON take extreme care not to get an electric shock d When dismounting or mounting the battery holder on the SRAM card take care so that the battery does not come out of the battery holder e When replacing the battery with the PLC power supply OFF always back up the data before starting replacement Battery replacement procedure 1 Back up the SRAM card data using GX Developer 2 Replace the battery 3 Write the backed up data from GX Developer to the memory card Replacing battery Using a flat screw driver slide the battery holder s locking switch away from the LOCK position Remove the old battery from its holder Insert a new battery into the holder in the correct direction Remove the battery holder from the SRAM card Open the front cover while the PLC power supply is on RELEASE position t Push the battery holder all the way into the memory card and confirm that the battery holder s locking switch is set to the LOCK position Monitor SM52 to verify on off Monitor SD52 to verify the bit number that is on A bit other than 0 is on OFF Bit 0 is
182. dule 11 79 TROUBLESHOOTING Constant scan waiting time ms unit Constant scan waiting time us unit Low speed program cumulative execution ime ms unit Low speed program cumulative execution ime us unit Low speed program execution time ms unit Low speed program execution time us unit Scan program execution time ms unit Scan program execution time us unit Unit module No Module service intervals ms unit Module service intervals us unit Special Register List Continued Waiting time at the time of constant scan setting is stored into SD542 SD543 Measurement is made in 100 s increments SD542 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD543 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Cumulative execution time of low speed program is stored into SD544 SD545 Measurement is made in 100s increments SD544 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD545 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Cleared to 0 after end of low speed one scan Execution time of low speed program during one scan is stored into SD546 SD547 Measurement is made in 100us increments SD546 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD547 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Stored every scan Execution time of scan program during one scan is stored into SD548 SD549 Measurement is made in 100s increments SD548 Place of ms is stored storage
183. e Pe D240 Base mode Stores the base mode S Initial New 1 Detail mode No of 0 Main base only Ee 1 to 7 No of e Stores the maximum number of the extension bases unit being extension 7 S Initial New extension installed bases bases B7 B2 B1 BO Base type Fedo P differentiation ENSE 7 ze kB Main base unit a lled pis ist expansion QCPU A Q base installe ase Remote SW 2nd expansion S Initial New differentiation A mode base When no expansion 1 Q Bis to base is installed the installed T value is fixed to 0 expansion Q mode base B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO SD243 Expansion 3 Expansion 2 Expansion 1 Main No of base SD244 slots Expansion 7 Expansion 6 Expansion 5 Expansion 4 S Initial New As shown above each area stores the number of slots being installed S Loaded Loaded maximum Ve When SM250 goes from OFF to ON the upper 2 digits of the final Request New O4Rem maximum I O I O No I O number plus 1 of the modules loaded are stored as BIN values a Q2A S1 Head VO Head UO No for S1 number for module replacement replacement RS 422 baud RS 422 baud rate e Stores baud rate of RS 422 S When rate 0 9600bps 1 19 2kbps 2 38 4kbps changed N f umbar 7 Indicates the number of modules installed on MELSECNET 10 H modules installed VO No je MELSECNET 10 UO number of first module installed H Network e i No MELSECNET 10 H network numbe
184. e in error Device Bit number b8 b5 SD1228 j e og sp1229 Uf i Ca uy SD1230 46 4 EN EN D1231 62 6 E KU The bit corresponding to the station number with the error becomes 1 Example When local station 3 and remote I O station 14 have an error bits 2 and 13 of SD1228 become 1 and when SD1228 is monitored its value is 8196 20041 11 95 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue ACPU Special Conversion Special Special Register after Register for Conversion Modification SD1240 SD1241 SD1242 Local station and remote I O station loop error Number of times communications errors detected Local station link type Station number D1243 station information for host Meaning Stores conditions or up to numbers 1to8 Stores conditions or up to numbers 9 to 16 Stores conditions or up to numbers 17 to 24 Stores conditions or up to numbers 25 to 32 Stores conditions or up to numbers 33 to 40 Stores conditions or up to numbers 41 to 48 Stores conditions or up to numbers 49 to 56 Stores conditions or up to numbers 57 to 64 Stores cumulative total of receive errors Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 Stores station number 0 to 64 Corresponding Detail etails CPU Stores the loc
185. e parameter 4083H App 4 App 4 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Countermeasure Error code Error Error description hexadecimal item 4084H he specified pointer P cannot be detected 4085 Pointer P cannot be specified because the S program is not specified in the parameter Check the data to be searched Specify pointer P after registering the program to be executed in the parameter Check the pointer No to be added and make correction Check the specified pointer and make a correction 4086H Pointer P has already been added 4087H rying to specify too many pointers 4088 The specified step No was not in the instruction y Other errors header An END instruction was inserted deleted while Conduct Insert removal after the CPU module has 4089H 8 the CPU module was running stopped Check the specified step No and make a correction during Run Write the program after the CPU module has stopped Reexecute after the CPU module is in a status where the mode request can be executed Check the number of settings and make a correction Check the number of registrations and make a correction Check the number of registrations and make a correction Check the number of registrations and make a correction he block breakpoint number was exceeded Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Reconduct the request after the processing has
186. e power off when cleaning the module or tightening the terminal screws or module mounting screws Conducting these operations when the power is on could result in electric shock Loose terminal screws may cause short circuits or malfunctions Failure to mount the module properly will result in short circuit malfunction or in the module falling In order to ensure safe operation read the manual carefully to acquaint yourself with procedures for program change forced outputs RUN STOP and PAUSE operations etc while operation is in progress Operation mistakes could cause damage to the equipment and other problems Never try to disassemble of modify module It may cause product failure malfunction fire or cause injury When using any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS phone keep them away from the controller at least 25 cm 9 85 inch or it may cause a malfunction Turn the power off when installing or removing the modules Trying to install or remove the module while the power is on could damage the module or result in erroneous operation In order that you can use the PLC in normal and optimal condition at all times this section describes those items that must be maintained or inspected daily or at regular intervals 10 1 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 1 Daily Inspection The items that must be inspected daily are listed below Daily inspection Inspection Item Jud
187. e power supply module in the Q3OB Q6LB and QA1S6LB Even if the power supply module is not installed when the I O modules and intelligent function module installed on the base units are of light load type the modules may be operated In this case because a voltage becomes unstable we cannot guarantee the operation 5 When an extension cable is used do not bind the cable together with the main circuit high voltage heavy current line or lay them close to each other 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION SE gt 2 MELSEC Q 6 Install the main base unit by screwing in the following procedure 1 Fit the two base unit top mounting screws into the enclosure Panel 2 Place the right hand side notch of the base unit onto the right hand side screw Panel 3 Place the left hand side pear shaped hole onto the left hand side screw TAT C 0 Panel 4 Fit the mounting screws into the mounting screw holes in the base unit bottom and retighten the four mounting screws Note1 Install the main base unit to a panel with no module loaded in the right end slot Remove the base unit after unloading the module from the right end slot Note2 The mounting screws that included with the slim type main base unit differ from those included with other types of the base unit When ordering mounting screws for the slim type main base unit specify cross recessed head bind screw M4 x 12 bla
188. e remote I O stations such as MELSECNET H remote I O NET CC Link data link and MELSECNET MINI S3 data link 2 Lineup according to program capacity The optimum CPU module for the program capacity to be used can be selected QO02CPU QO2HCPU 28k step QO6HCPU 60k step Q12HCPU 124k step Q25HCPU 252k step 3 Realised high speed processing Depending on the type of the sequencer high speed processing has been realized Example when LD instruction is used Q02CPU 0 0794s Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 0 0344s In addition an access to the intelligent function module or an increase in speed of the link refresh of the network have been realized by the connection system System bus connection of the newly developed base unit Access to the intelligent function module 20 us word approx 7 times 1 MELSECNET H link refresh processing 4 6ms 8k word approx 4 3 times 1 1 Where QO2HCPU is compared with Q2ASHCPU S1 4 Increase in debugging efficiency through high speed communication with GX Developer In the High Performance model QCPU a time required for writing reading of a program or monitoring has been reduced through the high speed communication at a speed of 115 2kbps max by the RS 232 and a communication time efficiency at the time of debugging has been increased In the QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU a high speed communication at a speed of 12Mbps is allowed through the USB 26k step program tra
189. e writing using FROM TO instruction is required Module Name High speed counter module _ A1SD61 A1SD62 A1SD62D S1 A1SD62E MELSECNET MINI S3 A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1SJ71T32 S3 Positioning module A1SD75P1 S3 P2 S3 P3 S3 ID module A1SJ711D1 R4 A1SJ71ID2 R4 f Some system configurations and functions are restricted when writing the parameter of the High speed interrupt fixed scan interval setting Refer to the following manual for the restrictions when the parameter of the High speed interrupt fixed scan interval setting has been written e High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Note that the above restrictions do not apply to the High Performance model QCPU of serial number 04011 or earlier since it ignores the High speed interrupt fixed scan interval setting 2 Software package GX Developer that can use the functions added to the High Performance model QCPU changes depending on the function version serial number of the CPU module Serial Number GX Developer Al Nersion 4 SW4D50 GPPW E oF later Functions added to 02092 Version 6 SW6D5C GPPW E or later Functions added to 03052 Version 7 SW7D5C GPPW E or later i Version 7 10L SW7D5C GPPW E Functions added to 04012 lat or later Refer to Section 2 3 to confirm the function version and serial number of the High Performance model QCPU 2 7 2 7 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE C
190. eat 9 23 9 6 1 The precautions on the WIiQ e cceccceccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceesseeceesaeeeeesaeesseeceesneesneeenesneeeseeeaes 9 23 9 6 2 Connecting to the power supply module 9 26 LOA Dally lee 10 2 IEN e gl Geet EE 10 3 10 3 Battery Replacement eeeceescessceseceseeeeeeeseeeeeneseeeseeesenseaeesaeeeaessaeseaeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaesenseeteeeseeeneets 10 4 10 3 RE ATI aint iach lind awe aetna etiaiiedtladh REEE ETT 10 5 10 3 2 Battery replacement Procedure aristis easa tanien a aa a R 10 7 A 8 A 8 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 1 to 11 99 1131 Troubleshooting Basics 3 3 4 sicnisdeniteniedenietieniadenioniad eenegen eeneg eeneg 11 1 Ti THOUDISS MOON E 11 2 11 2 1 Troubleshooting Towchart AAA 11 2 11 2 2 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is not turned om 11 3 11 2 3 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is flickering cecceceeceeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeaesaeeeeeeateaee 11 4 11 2 4 Flowchart for when the POWER LED is turned oft 11 5 11 2 5 Flowchart for when the RUN LED is turned oft 11 6 11 2 6 When the RUN LED is flickering AAA 11 7 11 2 7 Flowchart for when the ERR LED is on fflickering AAA 11 7 11 2 8 When the USER LED is turned om 11 8 11 2 9 When the BAT LED is turned on 11 8 11 2 10 Flowchart for when the BOOT LED is fickemng 11 9 11 2 11 Flowchart for when output module LED is not turned ON eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 11 10 11 2 12 Flowchart for wh
191. elligent function module during initial communication stage The size of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module is wrong 1401 When parameter I O allocation was being made there was no return signal from the special function module during initial processing stage When error is generated the initial O number of the special function module that corresponds to the common information is stored The EE function module was accessed in the program but EE was no response 1402 The special function module was accessed during the execution of a FROM TO instruction set but there was no response When an error is generated the program error location corresponding to the individual information is stored e There was no response from the intelligent function module when 1403 the END instruction is executed An error is detected at the intelligent function module When performing a parameter I O allocation a special function 1414 module could not be accessed during initial communications On error occurring the head I O number of the corresponding special function module is stored in the common information The FROM TO instruction set could not be executed due to a 1412 system bus error with a special function module On error occurring the program error location is stored in the individual information The High Performance model QCPU of function version A was loaded in a multiple CPU system configuration
192. en OFF gt priority ranking Instruction flag Pattern priority CHK priorities updated when ON execution Speed oriented Accuracy oriented Other than during divided processing During divided processing Transmission Batch processing e In processing of AD57 S1 goes ON when canvas S i processing Instruction i Divided processing screen is divided for transfer V selection execution Divided transmission status e In processing of AD57 S1 goes ON when screen is split S for transfer and goes OFF when split processing is Instruction completed execution Communication request to remote terminal module enabled Communication request to remote terminal module disabled Communication request registration area BUSY signal e Used to determine whether communications requests to S remote terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32 S3 Instruction can be executed or not execution S Instruction execution During DI El f g During E e ON when EIl instruction is being executed Comment read not completed Comment read completed Comment read completion flag e Switches ON for only one scan when COMRD or PRC instruction is completed S Status change Switches ON while a file is being accessed by the S FWRITE S FREAD COMRD PRC or LEDC instruction File not accessed File being accessed File being accessed S Status change Error detection per
193. en output load of output module does not turn om 11 11 11 2 13 Flowchart for when unable to read a program 11 12 11 2 14 Flowchart for when Unable to Write a program 11 13 11 2 15 Flowchart for when it is unable to perform boot operation from memory Car 11 15 11 2 16 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR occeurg 11 16 11 2 17 Flowchart for when CONTROL BUS ERR OCCUIS cccceceeceeteeteeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeseeetaeeaeeeeeeaeeaees 11 17 ay MEG us Tee EE 11 18 11 3 1 Procedure for reading error CODGS cceccceccceceeecececeteeeteceeeeeeeeseeesaeeeeeseeseesnenseeseeesneesneseneeenes 11 18 TT 2 Garer ee ET 11 19 UR Canceling Beigl tre 11 37 11 5 WO Module Troubleshbootng 11 38 11 5 1 Input Circuit troubleshooting AAA 11 38 11 5 2 Output Circuit trOUDIESNOOTING ee eececeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeaecaecaeeeeeeaeeaecaeseeesaesaeseeseeeeaeeeseateateas 11 41 11 6 Special Relay Listi ringaringa aa aaaeaii aaaeaii aiaa e ahaidea iaa iaa aat 11 42 117 Special Register Let Agen geen 11 64 APPENDIX 1 Error Code Return to Origin During General Data Processing eeeeeseeeesesesesereseeeees App 1 APPENDIX 1 1 Error code overall explanation A App 1 APPENDIX 1 2 Description of the errors of the error codes 4000H to 4FFFH ccceecceseeseeteees App 2 APPENDIX 2 External DIMENSIONS A App 7 APPENDIX 2 1 CPU module 0 cccecccccceceeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaecaeeeaeeaecaesaeeeaesaesaesaeseaeeaesaeseeseaseaesaeseetateas App
194. er which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on is stored in BIN code SD62 can be cleared by or instruction If another F number has been detected the clearing of SD62 causes the next number to be stored in SD62 When one of FO to 2047 is turned on by OUT F or SET F the F number which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on is stored in BIN code SD62 can be cleared by executing RST F or LEDR instruction or moving INDICATOR RESET switch on CPU front to ON position If another F number has been detected the clearing of SD62 causes the nest number to be stored in SD62 When operation error has occurred during execution of application instruction the step number at which the error has occurred is stored in BIN code Thereafter each time operation error occurs the contents of SD1010 are renewed 11 87 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification D1011 Step number at Error step which operation error has occurred D9014 D1014 lt UO control mode D9015 SD1015 SD203 Operating status Operating status of UO control mode number Main program ROM Main program RAM Subprogram 1 RAM Subprogram 2 RAM Subprogram 3 RAM Subprogram 1 ROM Subprogram 2 ROM Subprogram
195. erminal RAV1 25 to 3 5 RAV2 to 3 5 Applicable tightening torque 66 to 89Necm Ho 98mm 3 86inch External GES Iw O 27 4mm 1 08inch dimensions In 104mm 4 09inch Weight 0 18kg Application Contact 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q Power Supply Module Specifications Continued E EE 100 to 240VAC ee 24VDC SC 85 to 264VAC 15 6 to 31 2VDC 50 60Hz 5 i yO Max inputapparentpower J OVAL gt y O Max inputpower e o ow Oe Inrush current 20A within 8ms 81A within 1ms Rated output current aoo DR Overcurrent protection Jang Armored Overvoltage 5 5 to 6 5V protection 2 Within 1 Allowable momentary power failure Within 20ms ithin Omg period 3 at 24VDC input DEE Across inputs LG and outputs FG 500VAC across primary and g 2830VAC rms 3 cycles 2000 m 6562 ft 5VDC Across inputs and outputs LG and FG separated across inputs Insulation resistance and LG FG across outputs and FG LG 10MO or more by insulation resistance tester 5MQ or more by insulation resistance tester By noise simulator of 500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency RAV1 25 to 3 5 RAV2 to 3 5 66 to B9Necm In o y 130mm 5 12inch e By noise simulator of 1500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width Noise durability and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency e Noise voltage IEC61000 4 4 2kV dimensions H External 55mm 2 17inch 93 6mm 3 69inch 0 60kg 0 50kg 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE ME
196. error has occurred in the specified access 4B00xn Geng related le SE in the access destination orin destination or in a relay station to the access station and y 3 if so take countermeasures App 6 App 6 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 2 External Dimensions APPENDIX 2 1 CPU module nn 98 3 86 89 3 3 52 27 4 1 08 Unit mm inch APPENDIX 2 2 Power supply module 1 Power Supply Module Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P Q61P A1 POWER 98 3 86 lt PULL MITSUBISHI 55 2 2 17 Unit mm inch App 7 App 7 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 Power Supply Module Q64P nn Wa POWER DY Y YY YUU UU WOU VEU UY j Kal Oo lt PULL I MITSUBISHI 115 4 53 k 55 2 2 17 R Unit mm inch 3 Power Sup
197. es ON when a CC Link error is detected in any of the installed A 1S J61QBT11 Stays ON even after normal operation is restored ON if SFC program is correctly registered and OFF if not registered e Goes OFF if SFC dedicated instruction is not correct e Initial value is set at the same value as SM320 Goes ON automatically if SFC program is present SFC program will not execute if this goes OFF prior to SFC program processing e Starts SFC program when this relay goes from OFF to ON Stops SFC program when this relay goes from ON to OFF Status change QCPU Remote TEN S Initial M9100 Initial S Initial M9101 U format change 11 45 11 OFF Restart 11 TROUBLESHOOTING SFC program start status Presence absenc e of continuous transition for entire block Continuous transition prevention flag Output mode at block stop SFC device clear mode Output during end step execution Operation mode for low speed execution type program Access execution flag 46 ON Initial start Continuous transition not effective Continuous transition effective When transition is executed When no transition OFF Preserves Clear device Preserves device OFF Preserves Asynchronous mode ON Synchronous mode When ON access to the intelligent function module is completed MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued Explanati
198. es higher than 42 4V peak inside the I O modules of the 100 200VAC rated I O voltages Therefore the CE marked models are enhanced in insulation internally between the primary and secondary The I O modules of 24VDC or less rating are out of the Low Voltage Directive application range 3 CPU module memory card base unit Using 5VDC circuits inside the above modules are out of the Low Voltage Directive application range 4 Intelligent function modules special function modules The intelligent function modules special function modules such as the analog network and positioning modules are 24VDC or less in rated voltage and are therefore out of the Low Voltage Directive application range 5 Display device Use the CE marked display device 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 8 2 3 Power supply 8 2 4 Control box MELSEC Q The insulation specification of the power supply module was designed assuming installation category Il Be sure to use the installation category II power supply to the PLC The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by a thunderbolt Category has the lowest durability category IV has the highest durability O lt gt lt gt lt gt lt Category IV Category III Category II Category Figure 8 1 Installation Category Category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolating transformers fr
199. escription Countermeasure CPU file related error CPU device specified error Intelligent function module specification error The fil h th ified fil file No S TO i e speciftea SES Check the specified file name and file No does not exist The file name and file No of the specified file do not match Do not access the specified file Forcefully execute the request forcibly Or reexecute the request after the processing from the other location has ended The keyword specification set in the Access by specifying the keyword set in the corresponding drive memory is required corresponding drive memory The specified range exceeds the file range Check the specified range and access within that range Forcefully execute the request forcibly The same file already exists Or reexecute after changing the file name Revise the specified file contents The specified file capacity cannot be obtained Or reexecute after cleaning up and reorganizing the specified drive memory The request contents cannot be executed in the Do not execute a request for a specified drive memory in specified drive memory which an error has occurred Currently the request contents cannot be ee J Reexecute after the free wait time has passed he specified device name cannot be handled Check the specified device name Ze le Delete the file and then recreate the file The ifi rive mem not exi ee EENEG Check the specified drive memo
200. est and shortest wire possible The wire length must be 30 cm 11 81 inch or shorter The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in the PLC system to the ground so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured As the wires are used to relieve the noise the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna b The earth wire led from the earthing point must be twisted with the power supply wires By twisting with the earthing wire noise flowing from the power supply wires can be relieved to the earthing However if a filter is installed on the power supply wires the wires and the earthing wire may not need to be twisted 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 8 1 3 Cables MELSEC Q The cables extracted from the control panel contain a high frequency noise component On the outside of the control panel therefore they serve as antennas to emit noise To prevent noise emission use shielded cable for the cables which are connected to the I O modules and intelligent function modules and may be extracted to the outside of the control panel The use of a shielded cable also increases noise resistance The signal lines connected to the PLC I O modules and intelligent function modules use shielded cables to assure noise resistance under the conditions where the shield is earthed If a shielded cable is not used or not earthed correctly the
201. extension cable between the main base unit and Q5DB is 0 15 VDC or lower 3 When the GOT is bus connected a Selection condition 4 75VDC or higher should be supplied to the IN connector of the Q50B b How to calculate voltage to IN connector The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4 90VDC Extension stage 3 V R1 R2 R3 I1 Therefore the Q50B can be used if the voltage drop is 0 15VDC or lower 4 9VDC 4 75VDC 0 15VDC Main base unit Q30B Extension Cable Conductor Resistance Q Extension Cable Type Power supply module R1 Extension base unit Q50B QC05B QC06B ues QC12B QC30B i2 GOT l QC50B QC100B GOT gt Number of GOTs connected Max 5 units Symbol Description Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit Q501B 5VDC current consumption when the Q5DB is used as Extension n 1 n 1 to 5 n Extension No of the Q60B connected Sum total of current consumed by Q50B and currents consumed by I O intelligent function modules loaded on the Q50B 5VDC current consumption of the GOT current consumption per GOT is 254mA e Im 254 x c c Number of GOTs connected c 1 to 5 6 10 6 10 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q When connecting GOT by extension cable that is 13 2 m 43 31ft or longer the bus extension connector bo
202. formed Error detection not performed Request for communication with intelligent device station enabled ON Request for communication with intelligent device station disabled BIN DBIN instruction error disabling flag e Turned ON when OPERATION ERROR is suppressed for BIN or DBIN instruction BUSY signal for CC Link communication request registration area e Used for determination whether to enable or disable the S communication request for the intelligent device station Instruction connected with A 1S J61QBT11 execution SM704 SM707 SM710 SM711 SM712 SM714 SM715 SM720 SM721 SM722 SM730 11 49 11 49 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued eel yee PKEY instruction OFF Instruction not ON when PKEY instruction is being executed SM736 _ execution in executed Goes OFF when CR is input or when input character Instruction progress flag ON Instruction execution string reaches 32 characters execution OFF Keyboard input s reception enabled Goes ON when keyboard input is being conducted Instruction ON Keyboard input Goes when keyboard input has been stored at the CPU z execution reception disabled MSG instruction OFF Instruction not S executed Goes ON when MSG instruction is executed Instruction New reception flag 3 d 8 ON Instruction execution execution N SM774 PID bumpless OFF Forces match e In manual mode designates whether or not to
203. gment Criteria Check that fixing screws 1 Installation of base unit jare not loose and the Bes EE be installed Seier tighten the cover is not dislocated WW Check that the module is Installation of I O not dislocated and the unit The unit fixing hook must be engaged and Securely engaged module fixing hook is engaged installed securely the unit fixing hook securely Check for loose terminal Screws should not EEN Retighten terminal screws screws 2 Check distance between The proper clearance should be provided Connecting conditions Solderless terminals between Solderless terminals Correct Check connectors of Connections should ne beloose Retighten connector extension cable mounting screws Power supply The LED must be ON Abnormal if the POWER LED Check that the LED is ON LED is OFF CPU Check that the LED is ON The LED must be ON Abnormal if the RUN LED in RUN status LED is OFF CPU Check that the LED is The LED must be OFF Abnormal if the ERR LED OFF LED is ON or flickering CPU Check that the LED is The LED must be OFF Abnormal if the BAT LED OFF LED is ON The LED must be ON when the input power is turned ON Follow Section 10 2 Check that the LED turns The LED must be extinguished when the ON and OFF input power is turned OFF Abnormal if the LED does not turn ON or turn OFF as indicated above The LED turns ON when the output power is turned ON Check that the LED turns The LED must
204. h enabled in the whole range QCPU function Ver B or later Correct the type or station number of the MELSECNET H module in the parameter to meet the used system heck the network parameters and the installation state If inconsistency is found arrange consistency between network parameters and the installation state If network parameters are changed write the new network parameters to the CPU module Check the number of extension stages of the extension base unit Check the state of connection of the extension base unit and connector If the display unit is connected to the main base unit or extension base unit check the state of connection If the error persists after the above items 1 through 3 are checked the hardware is faulty Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative and explain the symptom Write after correcting network parameters If the error persists after corrections have been made contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative 1 Delete the Ethernet setting parameter of the Q series Ethernet interface module under control of another station 2 Change the setting to the first O number of the Q series Ethernet interface module under control of the host station 1 Write after correcting network parameters If the error persists after corrections have been made contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative QCPU function or later O Rem Write after correcting network parameters QnA If
205. he Check the control system condition 6210 standby system Check the control system condition 6100 A CPU module tracking memory error was detected during initial The standby system in a redundant system could not be switched 6220 from the control system to the standby system because of an error status or other reason e 6221 Switching is disabled because of a bus switching module error Switching is disabled because of a bus switching module error disabled because of a bus switching module error Switching is disabled because a multiplexed master station of a 6222 remote I O network was installed in the standby station during initial Ina onand neler satone camot siant This ener cured at CPU system station 1 resulted in stop error at power on and the other stations cannot start onand neler satone camot siant This ener cured at error occurred at stations 2 to 4 1 There is no response from the target station in a multiple CPU 7002 system at initial communication stage 2 High Performance model QCPU of function version A was 1 In a multiple CPU system at CPU module fault occurred at a station where all station stop by stop error of PLC was selected in the operating mode 7000 2 High Performance model QCPU of function version A was loaded in a multiple CPU system loaded in a multiple CPU system configuration 7003 There is no response from the target station in a multiple CPU system at initial communic
206. he MODE LED turned on Is the RESET L CLR switch of the CPU module in the neutral position RESET position Move the RESET L CLR switch to the neutral position Neutral position Is the MODE LED turned on Hardware fault Check operations in the order starting from the minimum system If the module will not work please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Completion 11 4 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 4 Flowchart for when the POWER LED is turned off 11 5 MELSEC Q The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the POWER LED of the power supply module turns off at PLC power on or during operation POWER LED is turned off Is there a power supply Supply power Can POWER LED be turned on Is the power supply voltage within the voltage range given in the specifications The supply voltage should be within the rated range Can POWER LED be turned on Is the power supply module fixed Properly fix the power supply module Can POWER LED be turned on 1 Check the electric current capacity and reduce the amount of overcurrent 2 Turn OFF the input power and wait several minutes before turning it ON again s overcurrent protection and overvoltage protection wor
207. he shielded cable as shown below is not recommended The high frequency impedance will increase and the shield will be ineffective Clamp fitting Paint mask Shielded cable Shielded cable Wire Crimp terminal 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q b Positioning modules Precautions to be followed when the machinery conforming to the EMC Directive is configured using the A1SD75P1 S3 A1SD75P2 S3 A1SD75P3 S3 hereafter referred to as the A1SD75 are described below 1 When wiring with a 2 m 6 56 ft or less cable e Ground the shield section of the external wiring cable with the cable clamp Ground the shield at the closest location to the A1SD75 external wiring connector e Wire the external wiring cable to the drive unit and external device with the shortest practicable length of cable e Install the drive unit in the same panel External wiring connector Cable clamp External wiring cable within 2 m 6 56 ft Pa Drive unit 2 When wiring with cable that exceeds 2 m 6 56 ft but is 10 m 32 79 ft or less Power supply module e Ground the shield section of the external wiring cable with the cable clamp Ground the shield at the closest location to the A1SD75 external wiring connector e Install a ferrite core e Wire the external wiring cable to the drive unit and external device with the shortest practicable length of cable External wiring connector
208. he back cover Print Date _ Manual Number Dec 1999 SH NA 080037 A First edition Sep 2000 SH NA 080037 B Addition model Q33B Q63B Q63P Addition Section 2 3 4 5 11 2 3 11 2 10 11 2 11 Partial correction Section 1 2 2 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 1 5 2 8 1 5 11 2 1 11 3 2 11 5 1 11 6 11 7 Jun 2001 SH NA 080037 C Addition model Q62P Q52B Q55B QC05B Addition Section 6 6 Partial correction Section 2 1 2 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 6 1 6 2 6 3 8 1 5 11 2 4 11 7 Sep 2001 SH NA 080037 D Addition model Q64P Partial correction CONTENTS Section 4 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 2 6 1 6 2 8 1 5 11 5 1 Appendix1 2 2 2 Apr 2002 SH NA 080037 E Partial correction Chapter 1 Section 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 3 4 1 5 1 1 7 1 7 2 7 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 Oct 2002 SH NA 080037 F Complete review Addition model Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Q61SP Japanese Manual Version SH 080019 1 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property ights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q Series of General Purpose Programmable
209. he error that occurred 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 36 QCPU function Ver B or later QCPU function Ver B or later Q function Ver B or later QCPU function Ver B or later 11 36 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 4 Canceling of Errors The High Performance model QCPU can perform the cancel operation for errors only when the errors allow the CPU module to continue its operation To cancel the errors follow the steps shown below 1 Eliminate the cause of the error 2 Store the error code to be canceled in the special register SD50 3 Energize the special relay SM50 OFF gt ON 4 The error to be canceled is canceled After the CPU module is reset by the canceling of the error the special relays special registers and LEDs associated with the error are returned to the status under which the error occurred If the same error occurs again after the cancellation of the error it will be registered again in the error history When multiple enunciators F detected are canceled the first one with No F only is canceled 1 When the error is canceled with the error code to be canceled stored in the SD50 the lower one digit of the code is neglected Example If error codes 2100 and 2101 occur and error code 2100 to cancel error code 2101 If error codes 2100 and 2111 occur error code 2111 is not canceled eve
210. high frequency impedance will increase and the shield will be ineffective Clamp fitting Paint mask Shielded cable Shielded cable Wire Crimp terminal 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 2 4 MELSEC Q MELSECNET H module Always use a double shielded coaxial cable MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD 5C 2V CCY for the coaxial cables MELSECNET H module Radiated noise in the range of 30MHz or higher can be suppressed by use of the double shielded coaxial cables Earth the double shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to the ground Shield here Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield Ethernet module Web server module Precautions for using AUI cables twisted pair cables and coaxial cables are described below a Always earth the AUI cables connected to the 10BASE5 connectors Because the AUI cable is of the shielded type strip part of the outer cover and earth the exposed shield section to the ground on the widest contact surface as shown below AUI cable Shield Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield b Use shielded twisted pair cables as the twisted pair cables connected to the 10BASE T 100BASE TX connectors For the shielded twisted pair cables strip part of the outer cover and earth the exposed shield section to the ground on the widest contact surface as shown below Shielded twisted pair cables Shield Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield
211. his section describes the specifications of the extension cables for the base units main slim type and extension base unit used in the PLC system and the specification standards of the extension base unit 6 1 Base Unit Specification Table Main base unit specifications Number of I O modules i 3 5 installed Dee of extension Extendable Applicable module module Q series modules VDE imternalcurrent 0 105A 0 110A 0 114A 0 121A Kee Mounting hole size hole size M4 screw hole or 4 5 hole for M4 screw oH 98mm 3 86inch w 189mm 7 44inch 245mm 9 65inch 328mm 12 92inch 439mm 17 30inch 44 1mm 1 74inch 0 21kg 0 25 kg 0 35 kg 0 45 kg ttachment Mounting screw M4 x 14 4 pieces DIN rail mounting adapter to be sold separately DIN rail i el Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1 Adapter type 2 Slim type main base unit specifications SH Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Number of I O modules Gees Ge of extension Cannot connect extension modules Applicable module module Q series modules 5 VDC internal current 0 086A 0 086A 0 091A consumption Mounting hole size M4 screw hole or 4 5 hole for M4 screw oH 98mm 3 86inch w 114mm 4 49inch 142mm 5 59inch 198mm 7 80inch LOS 18 5mm 0 73inch Weight 0 12kg 0 15 kg 0 21 kg Attachment Mounting screw M4 x 12 4 pieces DIN rail mounting adapter to be sold separately DIN rail mounting Adapter type Ge 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 3 Extensi
212. ift the module upwards and remove the module fixing latch from the module fixing hole g Completion D When the module fixing screw is used always remove the module by removing the module fixing screw and then taking the module fixing latch off the module fixing hole of the base unit Do not try to remove the module forcibly since this may damage the module 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 2 Installation and removal of the module from QA1S60B The procedure for installing and removing the module from the QA1S60B base unit is described below a Installation of module on QA1S60B Insert the module fixing Base unit ye projections into the module Le SS fixing hole in the base unit Module connector Install the module onto the Module base unit by pushing the FE yP 9 fixing hole top forward Module fixing projections Make sure that the module is firmly inserted in the base unit Then secure it with the module mounting screw Completion Module mounting screw Base unit te Module Make sure to install the module with the module fixing projection inserted into the module fixing hole using the module fixing screws Do not try to forcibly install the module without inserting the projection into the hole since this may damage the module connector and the module 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 S 2 MELSEC Q b Removal from QA
213. ing The setting areas for priorities are as follows B15 Bi2B11 B8 B7 B4B3 BO D207 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 i Priority 1 Priority 6 1 Priority 5 SD208 Priority 8 Priority 7 SD209 S D207 H4321 SD208 H8765 SD207 HO0A9 e No display is made if 0 is set Default Value Priority 10 Priority 9 However even if 0 has been set information concerning CPU module operation stop including parameter settings errors will be indicated by the LEDs without conditions The year last two digits and month are stored as BCD code at SD210 as shown below B4 B3 so Example B15 to Bi2B11 to B8B7 to T 1 I L July 1993 H9307 The day and hour are stored as BCD code at SD211 as shown below so Example B15 to B12B11 t to T T 1 1 1 H3110 The minutes and seconds after the hour are stored as BCD code at SD212 as shown below B15 to B12B11 to B8 B7 so Example 35 min 48 sec after the hour Minute e Stores the year two digits and the day of the week in SD213 in the BCD code format as shown below to B12B11 to B8B7 to H3548 B0 Example Friday H0005 Higher digits of year 0 to 99 Day of week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday e The day of the week is stored as BCD code at SD213 a
214. ing within the PC system setting in GX Developer PC parameters when converted special relays are not used The following are additional explanations about the Special Relay for Modification column When a special relay for modification is provided the device number should be changed to the provided QCPU QnACPU special relay When W is provided the converted special relay can be used for the device number When Ais provided the device number does not work with QCPU QnACPU Special Relay List ACPU Special Special Applicable Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details Pp i SA CPU Relay Conversion Modification e Turned on when there is one or more output units of OFF Normal which fuse has been blown Remains on if normal status M9000 SM1000 Fuse blown ON Module with blown fuse is restored i Output modules of remote I O stations are also checked fore fuse condition Turned on if the status of VO module is different form entered status when power is turned on Remains on if normal status is restored M9002 SM1002 VO module ER Normal I O module verification is done also to remote I O station verification error JON Error modules Reset is enabled only when special registers SD1116 to SD1123 are reset OFF Normal Turned on when the MINI S3 link error is detected on M9004 SM1004 NIMI link error even one of the MELSECNET MINI master modules QnA ON Error i g being loaded Remains on
215. ing GX Developer refer to the Operating Manual of GX Developer For details of I O number allocation refer to the following manual e High Performance Model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals POINT For the extension using the Q50B Q6BOB and QA1S6LB allocate the I O numbers on the modules starting from the Q series module installed on the Q50B Q6LB base unit lt Example gt Where 32 modules are installed in all slots with the configuration shown below as8B main base unit 00 to FF Q68B extension base unit 100 to 1FF Haa1se8B extension base unit 200 to 2FF QA1S68B extension base unit 300 to 3FF 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 6 Guideline for Use of Extension Base Units Q50B Since the Q5DB is supplied with 5VDC from the power supply module on the main base unit a voltage drop occurs at extension cables Improper I O may be provided if the specified voltage 4 75VDC or higher is not supplied to the IN connector of the Q50B When using the Q50B make sure that the IN connector of the Q5DB is supplied with 4 75VDC or higher And it is recommend to connect it with the shortest possible extension cable right after connecting the main base unit so as to minimize the effects of voltage drop 1 When only the Q50B is connected to the extension base unit a Selection condition 4 75VDC or higher should be supplied to the IN connector of
216. ink error detection status in the mounted MELSECNET MINI S3 master module B15 to B8 B7 to 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 A A On the PLC CPU and A 1S J71PT32 S3 side the bit corresponding to the A 1S J71PT32 S3 that cannot make data communication turns ON Bits which correspond to the signals of A 1S J71PT32 S3 shown below are turned on as the signals are turned on Hardware error X0 X20 MINI S3 link error datection X6 X26 MINI S3 link communication error X7 X27 e Turned ON if instantaneous power failure of within 20ms occurs when AC power supply module is used and reset when power is switched OFF then ON e Turned ON if instantaneous power failure of within 10ms occurs when DC power supply module is used and reset when power is switched OFF then ON e Turned ON if instantaneous power failure of within ims occurs when DC power supply module is used and reset when power is switched OFF then ON Self diagnosis Self diagnosis error When error is found as a result of self diagnosis error D9008 SD1008 SDO R f error code code is stored in BIN code occurred Annunciator D9009 SD1009 SD62 i detection Step number at D9010 SD1010 Error step which operation error has occurred 11 87 F number at which external failure has e When one of FO to 2047 is turned on by OUT F or SET F the F numb
217. ints and simulation is not in 16point unit correct them to 16 point units App 3 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Error Error toes G code EO Error description Countermeasure hexadecimal item The request contents cannot be executed 4050H because the memory card write protect switch Turn off the memory card write protect switch is on D f Check the following and make it countermeasures The specified device memory cannot be 4051H Is the memory one that can be used accessed ce R e Is the specified drive memory correctly installed 4052u Protecterror The specified file attribute is read only so the Do not write data in the specified file data cannot be written Or change the file attribute Check the specified drive memory Or reexecute write after changing the corresponding drive memory Check the specified drive memory Or re erase after replacing the corresponding drive memory The monitor condition registration CPU module Reexecute monitor after the monitor by the other system area is already being used by another equipment has completed Or increase the system area piece of equipment of the program memory using the format with option Do not conduct monitor detail condi tions from the specified equipment An error occurred when writing data to the 4053H it specified drive memory An error occurred when deleting the data in the DE specified drive memory The monitor detail condition is already being used and mon
218. ion selected at the parameters or by the QCDSET instruction in ASCII code SD652 B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD651 Second character First character SD653 Comment file Comment file SD652 Fourth character Third character S Status Spes SD653 Sixth character Fifth character change SD654 Eighth character Seventh character SD655 First character of extension Zut SD655 Second character of SD656 Third character of extension extension SD656 steen i E i siores the drive number where the boot designation file QBT is Initial being stored SD661_ Boot Stores the file name of the boot designation file QBT to B8 B7 to BO e B15 operation SD662 H a SD661 Second character First character designation sD663 SD662 Fourth character Third character file SD663 Sixth character Fifth character S Initial SD664 i i SD664 Eighth character Seventh character kuer SD665 First character of extension Zut SD665 SD666 Third character of extension Second character of extension SD666 6 Instruction Related Registers Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU may 9 DoT stong During block operations turning SM705 ON makes it possible to use Mask pattern Mask pattern the mask pattern being stored at SD705 or at SD705 and SD706 if double words are being used to operate on all data in the block with SD706 the masked values Number of vacant sp714 communicati Store
219. ion of OFF Output until NULL code See is OFF characters up to NUL 00H code SI SE number or EE e When SM701 is ON ASCII codes of 16 characters are characters output ON 16 characters output output e Switched ON to disable the CHG instruction Switched ON when program transfer is requested Automatically switched OFF when transfer is complete e When SM1052 is ON the SEG instruction is executed as SEG instruction OFF 7SEG segment display an I O partial refresh instruction SM1051 SM1052 i ao ag switch ON I O partial refresh e When SM1052 is OFF the SEG instruction is executed as a 7 SEG display instruction OFF STEP RUN not in effect e Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STEP RUN Status latch OFF Not completed e Turned on when status latch is completed Turned off by completion flag _ ON Completed reset instruction OFF Other than when P set being requested Provides P set request after transfer of the other ON P set being requested program for example subprogram when main program is OFF Other than when P set being run is complete during run Automatically switched Sub side P set being requested off when P setting is complete request ON P Iset being requested completion completion Turned ON once when the P I set has been completed Sub program P and then turned OFF again set completion completion e Provides P set request after transfer of the other program fo
220. ion of the priority setting areas is as shown below B15 to B12B11 to Priority 4 Priority 3 D208 i Priority6 For details refer to the applicable CPUs User s Manual and the ACPU Programming manual Fundamentals B8B7 to Priority 2 B4B3 to Priority 1 BO SD207 Priority 7 Priority 5 MELSEC Q 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN E MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Details Conversion Conversion Modification Corresponding CPU When SM803 is turned ON OFF by peripheral device to activate sampling trace STRA STRAR value For sampling Step or time during stored in SD1044 is used as sampling trace condition trace sampling trace For scan For time Time 10ms increments Value is stored into SD1044 in BIN code Stores the block number of the expansion file register which is used as the work area for the execution of a register block No x 3 Work area for SFC program in a binary value SD1049 used as SFC SFC Stores 0 if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller program execution f a A Wester which cannot be expansion file register No 1 is used or if SM320 is OFF Stores code numbers of errors occurred in the SFC program in BIN code 0 No error Error code 80 SFC program parameter error generated by SFC 81 SFC code error program 82 Number of steps of simultaneous execution D1044 Extension file
221. irective eseseeeeeseseeresesresesnsistnsrsrnsrsrntnsrsrnsrnrnsnsnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnn 8 2 8 1 3 Gables wii nee atau aia aie aves vy Al eid Ree E Las ed Ds eed Lei 8 3 8 1 4 Power supply module eee eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeesaeeeaeesaeetaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesieetieesaeess 8 5 8 1 5 When using QA1S6 L B type base unit ceseecessesssesessesessesessesessesessesesseseaseseaseseaseseateseateseaesees 8 5 GN BE 8 8 8 2 Requirement to Conform to the Low Voltage Directive A 8 9 8 2 1 Standard applied for MELSEC Q series DI 8 9 8 2 2 MELSEC Q series PLC selechon 8 9 Rouer SUppN eco ee in EN an Mi Un We EN 8 10 8 2 4 Control ele EE 8 10 toM AEIOU O ID o Beare TNES AET nent re ere Erear esc reeee are ceercee T ATA 8 11 DAO External Wir ue DEE 8 11 9 1 General Safety Heouirements AA 9 1 9 2 Calculating Heat Generation by DU 9 6 OB Module peter e a NEESS 9 9 93 1 Precaution on installation ies sashes elena ied ee ede eed eee eer ae 9 9 9 3 2 Instructions for Mounting the base unit oo ee eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeaeenas 9 12 9 3 3 Installation and removal Of module AA 9 15 9 4 How to Set Stage Numbers for the Extension Base Unnt 9 19 9 5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable cccceccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeseeeeeeeaesaeseeseaeeaees 9 20 QS WIIG cetsc ite ct ies rach tvtkee ck etic te R E very eels leet eee EE eee ieee eee
222. is 2048 8001 11 Fuse blown module Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU Do Corresponding CPU D1300 e The numbers of output modules whose fuses have blown are D1301 input as a bit pattern in units of 16 points D1302 If the module numbers are set by parameter the parameter set D1303 Bit pattern in units numbers are stored 8 l D1304 of 16 points e Also detects blown fuse condition at remote station output LLL j H i modules ae D1305 indicating the 1514131211109 8 765 43 2 Cs D1306 Fuse blown modules whose A 1 0 1 aalies D1307 module fuses have blown SD1300 voo veo D1308 0 No blown fuse gp1301 wto olol 0 olo olo ANA nnn Inan Ivana 1 Blown fuse ANAN Wee AAA AANA n present D1331 H 0 e 0 o o 0 Jute Bo 30 ae Indicates a blown fuse Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one This flag is cleared by error resetting operation Bit pattern in units The module number in units of 16 points whose external power of 16 points supply has been disconnected is input as a bit pattern indicating the If the module numbers are set by parameter the parameter set Ext i modules whose numbers are used
223. ist or the network module is not the corresponding one 3 Alternatively it is not the relevant special function module The one specified in the network dedicated instruction is not a network module or a relay target network does not exist An instruction which on execution specifies other stations has been used for specifying the host station An instruction that does not allow the host station to be specified An instruction which on execution specifies the host station has been used for specifying other stations An instruction that does not allow other stations to be specified An instruction that does not allow the module under the control of another station to be specified is being used for a similar task Instruction was executed for the A or QnA module under control of another station 2117 A CPU module that cannot be specified in the instruction dedicated to the multiple CPU system was specified is nota 2111 2113 2114 2115 2116 MELSEC Q Corres ponding CPU QCPU function Ver B or later Read the individual information of the error check the program corresponding that value program error location and make correction 1 Read error individual information then check and edit the FROM TO instruction set that corresponds to the numerical value there Program error location 2 The special function module that is being accessed has a hardware error
224. it For details of the symbol refer to the user s manuals of the module used 6 8 6 8 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q List for Calculating Voltage Drops Occurring at Extension Cables in System Consisting of Extensions 1 to 7 QSOB Voltage Drop at Extension Cable on Corresponding Extension Unit Sum Total of Voltage Loading Drops to IN Connector Position of OSDIB V Extension Jay 14 Wi age 1 SS z ae v V1 Extension Extension pg R1 11 12 13 14 R2 12 13 14 R3 I3 14 R4 14 P f fvevtevenvarva ig fight R2 12 13 14 15 R3 13 14 15 R4 14 15 R5 15 f TI avave Extension R1 1 12 13 14 R2 12 13 14 15 V V 1 V2 V3 V4 V5 stage 6 BE 16 E EE lt e Extension RI 1 2 13 14 Ra 2 13 14 5 IB Ee VaV14V2 V3 V44V5 stage 7 EE G SI R4 I4415 16 17 R5 I5 16 17 R6 16 17 R7 17 VEN The voltage supplied to IN connector of the Q50B in the final extension reaches 4 75 VDC or higher on the condition that the sum total of voltage drop to IN connector of Q50B V is 0 15V or lower 2 When the Q6LIB is connected between the O3 Band the Q5LIB a Selection condition 4 75VDC or higher should be supplied to the IN connector of the Q50B in the final extension b How to calculate voltage to IN connector The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4 90VDC Therefore the Q50B can be used if the voltage drop is 0 15VDC or lower 4 9VDC 4
225. itial processing 4 3 2 I O refresh I O module refresh processing 4 3 3 Automatic refresh of the intelligent function module 4 3 4 END processing 4 4 RUN STOP PAUSE Operation Processing 4 5 Operation Processing during Momentary Power Failure 4 6 Data Clear Processing 4 7 WO Processing and Response Lag 4 7 1 Refresh mode 4 7 2 Direct mode 4 8 Numeric Values which Can Be Used in Sequence Programs 4 8 1 BIN Binary code 4 8 2 HEX Hexadecimal 4 8 3 BCD Binary Coded Decimal A 10 A 10 4 8 4 Real numbers floating decimal point data 4 9 Character String Data 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS 5 1 Relationship Between the Number of Stages and Slots of the Extension Base Unit 5 2 Installing Extension Base Units and Setting the Number of Stages 5 3 Base Unit Assignment Base Mode 5 4 What are I O Numbers 5 5 Concept of I O Number Assignment 5 5 1 WO numbers of main base unit and extension base units 5 5 2 Remote station UO number 5 6 I O Assignment by GX Developer 5 6 1 Purpose of I O assignment by GX Developer 5 6 2 Concept of I O assignment using GX Developer 5 7 Examples of I O Number Assignment 5 8 Checking the I O Numbers 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES 6 1 About the High Performance model QCPU s Memory 6 2 Program Memory 6 3 About the Standard ROM 6 4 About the Standard RAM 6 5 Memory Card 6 6 Writing Data to the Standard ROM or the Flash Card 6 6 1 Writing Data to the standard ROM or to the Flash card using GX Developer 6
226. itored byahother piege of Or reexecute monitoring after deleting the monitor detail equipment im conditions of the other equipment 4063H The nUMbErONINE Me Gek registratigng Reduce the number of registrations to 16 or less exceeds 16 40644 Online error the parameter Or check the data A keyword that differs from the keyword set in S the specified driver memory has been specified 4067H The specified monitor file cannot be obtained Conduct monitor after obtaining the monitor file EE EE Seen Reexecute the command after the request from the 4068H because the specified command is being other equipment has been completed executed 4069 The conditions have already been reached by Check the monitor conditions i the device match Or reconduct monitor registration and execute monitor 406AH Se Ve Check the specified drive and specify the correct drive EES Program before correction and the registration Check the registration program and make the programs 40707 Circuit inquiry program differ match 40804 heck the requested data contents Other errors 4066H Check the specified keyword 4081H The sort subject cannot be detected Check the data to be searched The specified command is executing and Reexecute the command after the request from the 4082H therefore cannot be executed other equipment is completed Trying a execute a progra n that is not Register the program to be executed in the parameter registered in th
227. its or malfunction Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module Such debris could cause fires damage or erroneous operation The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation The precautions on the connection of the power cables are described below 1 Power supply wiring a Separate the PLC s power supply line from the lines for I O devices and power devices as shown below When there is much noise connect an insulation transformer Insulation Main power PLC power transformer supply supply WE SE N AT 200VAC Or tO Oo CO S PLC l nm UO power supply MO OS gt O O gt O devices Main circuit device LON O O gt Main circuit device 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 2 MELSEC Q b Do not connect the 24VDC outputs of two or more power supply modules in parallel to supply power to one I O module Parallel connection will damage the power supply modules 2 gt 3 fe E Q O gt module WO module ia Power supply 24VDC External power supply c 100VAC 200VAC and 24VDC wires should be twisted as dense as possible Connect the modules with the shortest distance Also to reduce the volt
228. king Can POWER LED be turned on Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Completion 11 5 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 5 Flowchart for when the RUN LED is turned off The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the RUN LED of the CPU module turns off during PLC operation RUN LED is turned off Is the POWER LED of Proceed to Section 11 2 4 the power supply module lit Flowchart for when the POWER LED is turned off Proceed to Section 11 2 7 Flowchart for when the ERR LED is on flickering Is ERR LED on flickering RUN LED is on Reset the CPU module RESET L CLR switch 1 PLC part connection fault 2 By excessive noise RUN LED is off For the case of 1 For the Set the CPU module s RUN STOP case of 2 switch to STOP and write END to SE address 0 with the GX Developer Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Set the RUN STOP switch to RUN and enter to the monitor mode with the GX Developer to be operated RUN LED does not turn on RUN LED is on Considered to be a sequence program error Check the program and modify the program error location C
229. l pe row pe DG SLD CC Link SLD CC Link SLD FG dedicated FG dedicated FG cable cable d IO signal lines For the I O signal lines if extracted to the outside of the control panel also ensure to earth the shield section of these lines and cables in the same manner as in item 1 above 2 Power supply module The precautions required for each power supply module are described below Always observe the items noted as precautions A1S61P A1S62P Not usable A1S63P x1 Use the CE marked 24VDC panel power equipment Always ground the LG and FG terminals after short circuiting them x1 If sufficient filter circuitry is built into the 24VDC external power supply module the noise generated by A1S63P will be absorbed by that filter circuit so a line filter may not be required Filtering circuitry of version F or later of A1S63P is improved so that a external line filter is not required 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 8 1 6 Others 1 MELSEC Q Ferrite core A ferrite core has the effect of reducing radiated noise in the 30MHz to 100MHz band It is not required to fit ferrite cores to cables but it is recommended to fit ferrite cores if shield cables pulled out of the enclosure do not provide sufficient shielding effects It should be noted that the ferrite cores should be fitted to the cables in the position immediately before they are pulled out of the enclosure If the fitting position is improper
230. l Relay List Continued MELSEC Q SES Ce E SM806 Status latch DEE et ready Goes ON when status latch is ready S preparation ON Ready chi Status ange U New SM807 Status latch OFF ON Latch e Runs status latch command vu fonw command SM808 aus latch Op R Latch net completed Comes ON when status latch is completed x completion ON Latch completed chi New Qn Status 9055 ange New SM809 Status latch clear OFF ON Clear e Enable next status latch u Nw Program trace OFF Not ready P A S preparation ON Ready Goes ON when program trace is ready ch SS new New ange MEI Start program OFF Suspend e Program trace started when this goes ON S Status New trace ON Start e Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF change Program trace CO a N D E bal CO be ES o 5 E Sc ENK OD Status i aa Suspend e ON when program trace execution is underway U New ON Start way QnA Program trace d e Program trace trigger goes ON when this goes from OFF S SE SE to ON Identical to PTRA instruction execution status ch N After program OFF Not after trigger s S SM814 trace trigger ON After trigger Goes ON after program trace trigger ch ew ange ange ange Step trace OFF Not ready d f N SM820 preparation ON Ready Goes ON after program trace registration at ready Program trace OFF Not completed j S SM815 ON End Goes ON at completion of program t
231. lue set Time value actually On On Continue Always 11 33 11 33 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres Error Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action ponding SDO x 1 CPU 4202 More than 16 nesting levels are programmed Keep nesting levels at 16 or under 4203 rd eid la eee aa although no FOR instruction error step corresponding to its numerical value program error H location and correct the problem 4210 The CALL instruction is executed but there is no subroutine at the specified pointer Read the common error information at a peripheral device check 4211 There was no RET instruction in the executed sub routine program _ error step corresponding to its numerical value program error The RET instruction was before the FEND instruction in the main location and correct the problem 4212 program 4213 More than 16 nesting levels are programmed Keep nesting levels at 16 or under 4220 Interrupt input was generated but no corresponding interrupt pointer was found The IRET instruction was before the FEND instruction in the main i program Read the common error information at a peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem The configuration of the check conditions for the CHK instruction is incorrect Alternatively a CHK instruction has been used in a low speed execution type program The designation of a MELSECNET MINI
232. ly module it is possible to prevent the sensor to which the AC input module is connected from turning OFF when it is ON when the power is turned OFF However if only the AC input module is connected to the AC line which is connected to the power suppludetection of the AC down for the power supply module may be delayed by the capacitor in the AC input module Thus connect a load of approx 30mA per QX10 unit to the AC line 2 For DC input power supply e An instantaneous power failure lasting less than 10ms 4 will cause 24VDC down to be detected but operation will continue e An instantaneous power failure lasting more than 10ms CA may cause the operation to continue or initial start to take place depending on the power supply load x4 This is for a 24VDC input This is 10ms or less for 24VDC or less 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q 5 1 2 Selecting the power supply module The power supply module is selected according to the total of current consumption of the base units I O modules intelligent function module special function module and peripheral devices supplied by its power supply module For the internal current consumption of 5 VDC of the base unit refer to Chapter 6 For the internal current consumption of 5 VDC of the I O modules intelligent function module special function module and peripheral devices refer to the Manuals of their respective modules For the devices obtained by a user see the manu
233. mally when the network module detects a network error and issues a switching request to the host system CPU OFF Normal ON Switching unsuccessful S Error ocurrs Switching status from GN the network module 11 60 11 60 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List 11 For redundant system Other system CPU information 1 for Q4AR only SM1600 to SM1650 only valid for the CPU redundant system backup mode so they cannot be refreshed during the separate mode Either the backup mode or the separate mode is valid for the SM4651 to SM1699 SM1600 to SM1699 are all turned off for standalone system S t by ACPU Applicable Number Name Meaning Explanation When Set M9 L D O ap e Turns on if a error occurs in the diagnosis results OFF No error SM1600 Diagnosis error Including external diagnosis ON Error BE aio wm e Remains on even if returns to normal thereafter ae No sel e e Turns on when an error occurs in the self diagnosis Self diagnosis error diagnosis Siet results OM ee e Remains on even if returns to normal thereafter Each END OFF No error Error common e e Turns on when there is error common information and the S New information SM1600 is on Each END ON Error common information OFF No error Error individual aces e Turns on when there is error individual information and the S information Ge SM1600 is on Each END ON Error individual information SM1653 STOP contact STOP
234. mber of insertions and extractions 5000 times Number of writings 1000000 times 45mm 1 77inch External dimensions 42 8mm 1 69inch 3 3mm 0 13inch 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 2 Battery Specifications For CPU Module and SRAM Card 1 For CPU module Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery Initial voltage 3 0V Nominal current 1800mAh Classification Storage life 10 years room temperature Total power failure time Refer to Section 10 3 1 Power failure backup for program Application memory standard RAM and latch devices 2 For SRAM card Classification Graphite fluoride primary batter Initial voltage 3 0V Nominal current 48mAh Storage life 5 years room temperature Total power failure time Refer to Section 10 3 1 Application Power failure backup for SRAM card Refer to Section 10 3 1 for the battery life 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 3 Handling the Memory Card 1 Formatting of memory card Any SRAM or ATA card must have been formatted to use on the High Performance model QCPU Since the SRAM or ATA card purchased is not yet formatted format it using GX Developer before use The Flash card need not be formatted For the formatting procedure refer to the Operating Manual of the GX Developer 2 Installation of SRAM card battery A power interrupt hold on battery is furnished with the SRAM card you purchased Before using the SRAM
235. measurement range EN55011 ae ett americas from the 150 k 500 kHz Op 79 dB Mean 66 dB 1 Conducted noise P P 500 k 30 MHz QP 73 dB Mean 60 dB measured Immunity test in which static Ee electricity is applied to the cabinet of 15 k V Aerial discharge Electrostatic immunity 2 the equipment Power line 2kV Digital I O 24 V or higher 1 kV EN50081 2 1995 EN61000 4 4 Immunity test in which burst noise is EN61131 2 Fast transient burst noise gt 2 SECH tote power ne and signa Digital I O 24 V or less gt 250 V Analog I O signal lines gt 250 V 1996 sai AM Immunity test in which field is 10 V m 26 1000 MHz S irradiated to the product 80 AM modulation 1 kHz modulation 2 EN61000 4 12 Immunity test in which a damped Damped oscillatory wave oscillatory wave is superimposed on immunity the power line Power line Digital I O 24 V or higher x1 QP Quasi peak value Mean Average value 2 The PLC is an open type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel The tests for the corresponding items were performed while the PLC was installed inside a control panel 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 8 1 2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive The PLC is open equipment and must be installed within a control cabinet for use This not only ensures safety but also ensures effective shielding of PLC generated electromagnetic
236. module or the base unit is experiencing problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative An intelligent function module the CPU module or the base unit is experiencing problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative 1 Change the High Performance model QCPU of function version A for the High Performance model QCPU of function version B 2 An intelligent function module CPU module or the base unit is experiencing problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative An intelligent function module the CPU module or the base unit is experiencing problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative An intelligent function module CPU module or the base unit is experiencing problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi Ver B representative or later This is experiencing hardware problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Check tne power sump e function A momentary power supply interruption has occurred 1500 The power supply went off Check the power supply The 5 VDC supplied to one of the two power supply modules in the 1510 redundant system extension base unit has dropped below 85 of the rated voltage The 5 VDC supplied to the power supply modules in the extension base unit has dropped below 80 of the rated voltage The 24 VDC power supplied to the system management module AS92R has dropped below 85 of the rated voltage 1520 1530 1 Voltage in the CPU module battery
237. n RESET Used to perform hardware reset operation fault rest operation initialization etc If this switch is left in the RESET position the whole system will be reset and 15 DIP switches RESET L CLR switch the system will not operate properly After performing reset always return this switch to the neutral position L CLR Used to turn OFF or zero all data in the parameter set latch area Used to clear the sampling trace and status latch registration Module fixing screw hole Hole for the screw used to fix to the base unit M3 X 12 screw Module fixing latch Hook used to fix to the base unit For connection of battery lead wires 18 Battery connector pin When shipped from the factory the lead wires are disconnected from the connector to prevent the battery from consuming 19 Batter Backup battery for use of program memory standard RAM and power failure y compensation function 1 1 When normally connecting a cable to the USB connector or RS 232 connector clamp the cable to prevent it from coming off due to the dangling moving or carelessly pulling of the cable Q6HLD R2 type RS 232 Connector Disconnection Prevention Holder is available as a clamp for RS 232 connector CPU module Q6HLD R2 RS 232 cable 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 3 Switch Operation After Writing in Program When writing a program into the CPU
238. n if error code 2100 is canceled 2 Errors developed due to trouble in other than the CPU module are not canceled even if the special relay SM50 and special register SD50 are used to cancel the error Example The cause of SP UNIT DOWN error cannot be removed even by using the special relay SM50 and special register SD50 because the error is developed on the Q bus Refer to the error code list in Section 11 3 2 to remove the cause of the error 11 37 11 37 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 5 I O Module Troubleshooting MELSEC Q This chapter explains possible problems with I O circuits and their corrective actions 11 5 1 Input circuit troubleshooting Input signal does not turn OFF Example 1 Input signal does not turn OFF Input signal does not turn OFF Input signal does not turn OFF a 2 Q E Si x lt OI o 2 Q E Si x lt m 2 Q E Si x lt 11 38 This section describes possible problems with input circuits and their corrective actions Input Circuit Problems and Corrective Actions P Condition Cause Corrective Action e Leakage current of input switch e g drive by non contact switch AC input s Leakage H current Power supply Input module e Drive by a limit switch with neon lamp AC input Leakage Power supply e Leakage current due to line capacity of wiring cable Line capacity C of twisted pair wire is approx 100 pF m AC inp
239. n status 64 SD1212 is monitored its value is 64 40u D9205 D9206 Stores the number of retry times due to transmission Number of Stored as cumulative error D921 D121 SH s retries value Count stops at maximum of FFFFH RESET to return the count to 0 D9211 D9212 D9213 D9214 11 94 11 94 11 ACPU Special Special Register after Conversion Conversion D9216 SD1216 D9217 SD1217 D9218 SD1218 D9219 SD1219 D9220 SD1220 D9221 SD1221 D9222 SD1222 D9224 SD1224 D9225 SD1225 D9226 SD1226 D9227 SD1227 D9228 SD1228 D9229 SD1229 D9230 SD1230 D9231 SD1231 11 95 Special Register for Modification TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue Local station error detect Local station parameters non conforming remote I O station UO allocation error Local station and remote I O station initial communications underway Local station and remote I O station error Meaning Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers Stores conditions Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions
240. n the CPU module does not operate properly 1203 The operation circuit that conducts index modification in the CPU module is not operating properly 1204 The hardware logic in the CPU us not operating properly This suggests a CPU module hardware error Contact your nearest The operation circuit that conducts sequence processing in the CPU Mitsubishi representative in not operating properly The DSP operation circuit in the CPU is not operating properly 1 Check ERR LED of the output modules and replace the module whose LED is lit 2 Read the common error information with the peripheral device and replace the fuse at the output module corresponding to the numerical value module No reading Alternatively monitor special registers SD1300 to SD1331 with the peripheral device and change the fuse of the output module whose bit has a value of 1 heck ERR LED of the output modules and replace the fuse of the module whose LED is lit 2 Read the common error information with the peripheral device and replace the fuse at the output module corresponding to the numerical value module No reading Alternatively monitor special registers SD1300 to SD1331 with the peripheral device and change the fuse of the output module whose bit has a value of 1 heck ERR LED of the output modules and replace the module whose LED is lit 2 Read the common error information with the peripheral device 1 There is an output module with a
241. n when there are problems that the PLC CPU cannot detect such as in the I O controller 3 Output could be left on or off when there is trouble in the outputs module relay or transistor So build an external monitoring circuit that will monitor any single outputs that could cause serious trouble When overcurrent which exceeds the rating or caused by short circuited load flows in the output module for a long time it may cause smoke or fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as fuse Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply when the PLC main module power is turned on If the external power supply is turned on first it could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation When there are communication problems with the data link refer to the corresponding data link manual for the operating status of each station Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation operating status of each station Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q D DANGER When connecting a peripheral device to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer or the like to the special function module to exercise control data change on the running PLC configure up an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the whole system will always operate safely Also before exercising other control program change opera
242. n whether or not the link parameter setting of the master station in tier two matches that of the master station in tier three in a three tier system Valid only for the master stations in a three tier system e Depends on whether or not the B and W data controlled by higher link master station host station is sent to lower link local stations tertiary stations When SM1208 is OFF B and W of host station is sent to tertiary stations B and W of host station is not sent to tertiary stations Set to ON not to match B and W of the higher and lower links When SM1209 is ON the link parameters of the higher and lower links are not checked e When SM1209 is OFF the link parameters of the higher and lower links are checked QnA e When SM1208 is ON M9210 SM1210 Link card error for OFF Normal Depends on presence or absence of the link card master station ON Abnormal hardware error Judged by the CPU Link module error M9211 SM1211 for local station use M9224 SM1224 j Link status OFF Normal ON Abnormal OFF Online ON Offline station to station test or self loopback test Depends on presence or absence of the link card hardware error Judged by the CPU Depends on whether the master station is online or offline or is in station to station test or self loopback test mode M9225 SM1225 Forward loop error OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line ON Abnormal M9
243. nd receiving signals from the main base unit or the other extension base units to which the extension cables are connected Do not remove the supplied connector cover connector For setting method refer to Section 6 4 Connectors for installing the power supply module I O modules and intelligent function module special function module To those connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed apply the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module to prevent entry of dirt Blank cover module applicable to Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B and Q612B QG60 Blank cover module applicable to QA1S65B and QA1S68B A1SG60 Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit 5 Module fixing screw hole Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B and Q612B Screw size M3 x 12 QA1S65B and QA1S68B Screw size M4 x 12 6 Extension cable connector 4 Module connector Hole for mounting this base unit on the panel of the control panel Base mounting hole Q52B Q55B Q65B Q68B and Q612B For M4 screw QA1S65B and QA1S68B For M5 screw DIN rail adapter e mounting hole DIN rail adapter mounting hole 6 5 6 5 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 4 Setting the Extension Base Unit The number of stages setting method of each extension base unit to be used when extension base units are installed is described below Stage No
244. nding ACPU Change and notation when there has been a change in contents Mo e Items indicated as New have been newly added for High performance model QCPU QnACPU e Indicates the corresponding CPU module type name Rem Can be applied to all CPU module types and MELSECNET H remote I O modules Can be applied to all types of CPU module QCPU Can be applied to High Performance model QCPU QnA Can be applied to QnA series and Q2ASCPU Series Remote Can be applied to the MELSECNET H remote I O modules Each CPU type name Can be applied only to the specific CPU module e g Q4ARCPU Q3ACPU Corresponding CPU For details on the following items refer to the following manuals e Networks e For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network e For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network e For QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual e SFC QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC 1 SM1200 to SM1255 are used for QnACPU These relays are vacant with QCPU 2 Special relays SM1500 and later are dedicated for Q4ARCPU 11 42 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List 1 Diagnostic Information Number N Meani i palais nen Se OFF No error Diagnostic errors ON Error OFF No self diagnosis errors ON Self diagnosis Self diagnosis error OFF No error common information ON Error common information
245. ned in the above equations Suppose that the resistance R is 12 kW The power capacity W of the resistor during activation of the switch is W Applied voltage R W 28 8 V f 12 k2 0 069 W Because the resistance is selected so that the power capacity is three to five times the actual power consumption a third to a half W should be selected In this case a resistor of 12 kQ and a third to a half W should be connected across the terminal and COM 11 40 11 40 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 5 2 Output Circuit Troubleshooting This section explains trouble examples and troubleshooting methods in the output circuit Output Circuit Troubleshooting Z Condition _ e When load is half wave rectified inside e Connect a resistor of several ten KQ to several This is typical of some solenoids hundred KQ across the load QY22 Output module Resistor Excessive voltage is applied to load when output turns When the polarity of the power supply is 1 off the capacitor C is charged When the polarity is 2 the voltage charged in C plus the power supply voltage is applied to across D1 The maximum value of the voltage is approx 2 2E This usage does not pose problems to the output components but may deteriorate the diode built in the load causing burnout etc e Leakage current due to the built in surge e Connect a resistor across the load suppressor If the wiring from the output module t
246. nformation Information LED Status Statuses of Diagnostic Timing 2 SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 x 1 ERROR CPU SP UNIT LAY ERR Unit module No Flicker At power ON At reset 2102 2103 SP UNIT LAY ERR Unit module No Off Flicker Stop JAt power ON At reset Bits E ik m 2104 2105 2106 SP UNIT LAY ERR Unit module No 2107 2108 SP UNIT LAY ERR Unit module No 2109 6 x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 6 This can only be detected in the redundant system standby system 11 23 11 23 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres Error Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action ponding SDO 1 CPU Slot loaded with the QI60 is set to other than the Inteli intelligent function module or Interrupt interrupt module in the parameter H assignment 1 In the parameter I O allocation settings an Inteli intelligent function module was allocated to a location reserved for an I O module or vice versa 2 In the parameter I O allocation settings a module other than CPU or nothing was allocated to a location reserved for a CPU module or vice versa 3 A general purpose switch was set to the module with no general purpose switches In parameter I O allocation settings a special function module was allocated to a location reserved for an I O module Or the opposite has happened 13 or more A series
247. ng OFF When transition is completed ON When no transition OFF Watchdog timer reset ON Watchdog timer reset start Trace started Trace completed Trace not being executed Trace execution under way Trace disable suspend Trace enable Coil output OFF Coil output ON VO numbers displayed OFF Data recovery disabled ON Data recovery enabled Details e Set when consecutive transfer is not executed with consecutive transfer enabled Reset when transfer of one step is completed Consecutive transfer of a step can be prevented by writing an AND condition to corresponding SM324 Turned on when the step transfer monitoring timer is started Turned off when the monitoring timer is reset e Set when sampling trace of all specified blocks is completed Reset when sampling trace is started Set when sampling trace is being executed Reset when sampling trace is completed or suspended Selects sampling trace execution enable disable ON Sampling trace execution is enabled OFF Sampling trace execution is disabled If turned off during sampling trace execution trace is suspended Selects the operation output when block stop is executed ON Retains the ON OFF status of the coil being used by using operation output of the step being executed at block stop OFF All coil outputs are turned off Operation output by the SET instruction is retained regardless of the ON OFF status of M9196
248. noise 1 Control cabinet a b Use a conductive control cabinet When attaching the control cabinet s top plate or base plate mask painting and weld so that good surface contact can be made between the cabinet and plate c To ensure good electrical contact with the control cabinet mask the paint on the installation bolts of the inner plate in the control cabinet so that contact between surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area Earth the control cabinet with a thick wire so that a low impedance connection to ground can be ensured even at high frequencies Holes made in the control cabinet must be 10 cm 3 94 inch diameter or less If the holes are 10 cm 3 94 inch or larger radio frequency noise may be emitted In addition because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control panel door and the main unit reduce the clearance as much as practicable The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of an EMI gasket on the paint surface Our tests have been carried out on a panel having the damping characteristics of 37 dB max and 30 dB mean measured by 3 m method with 30 to 300 MHz 2 Connection of power and earth wires Earthing and power supply wires for the PLC system must be connected as described below a Provide an earthing point near the power supply module Earth the power supply s LG and FG terminals LG Line Ground FG Frame Ground with the thick
249. noise resistance will not meet the specified requirements When the shield of a shielded cable is earthed to the cabinet body please ensure that the shield contact with the body is over a large surface area If the cabinet body is painted it will be necessary to remove paint from the contact area All fastenings must be metallic and the shield and earthing contact must be made over the largest available surface area If the contact surfaces are too uneven for optimal contact to be made either use washers to correct for surface inconsistencies or use an abrasive to level the surfaces The following diagrams show examples of how to provide good surface contact of shield earthing by use of a cable clamp 1 Earthing of shielded of shield cable a Earth the shield of the shielded cable as near the module as possible taking care so that the earthed cables are not induced electromagnetically by the cable to be earthed b Take an appropriate measures so that the shield section of the shielded cable from which the outer cover was partly removed for exposure is earthed to the control panel on an increased contact surface A clamp may also be used as shown in the figure below In this case however apply a cover to the painted inner wall surface of the control panel which comes in contact with the clamp section Note The method of earthing by soldering a wire onto the shield section of the shielded cable as shown below is not recommended The
250. nsfer time Q25HCPU USB 12 Q25HCPU RS 232 30 Q2ASHCPU 86 A2USHCPU S1 94 SE a E e 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Unit s 5 AnS series I O module or special function module are available For Q series if an appropriate module is not available the AnS series I O module or special function module can also be used for the High Performance model QCPU through the use of the QA1S65B QA1S68B extension base unit 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 6 Saved space by a reduction in size The installation space for Q series has been reduced by approx 60 of the space for AnS series Comparison of installation space MELSEC Atseap MELSEC AiSHeeu e PERG RUN ICL yal RUN Bd C RESET MITSUBISHI MITSUBISI M ere oxp 3 86 lt PULL PULL L USB ae Y PULL AIA S oo e 00 Joe or zl tal es Pr s o eoa ofo0 Josee rale il ES CS CGS OSs KEE SSCS CS ESS MITSUBISHI D 5 Slot Main Base Unit 245mm 9 65inch X 8 Slot Main Base Unit 328mm 12 92inch 12 Slot Main Base Unit 439mm 17 30inch depth 98mm 3 86inch 7 Connection of up to seven extension base units a The High Performance model QCPU can connect to seven extension base units eight base units including the main and accep
251. nstallation and removal of the module sssssseeseeeesnneeeeen 9 14 to 9 17 Installation dimensions sssseessesneeeeeeea 9 12 Installation drechon 9 13 Installation position eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene 9 12 Names Of parts aneer a 6 3 Dpechtcattons eener 6 1 Battery EC UE IB 7 6 Replacement procedure GPU MOdUIe vices ance ees ces 10 6 Replacement procedure SRAM Gard 10 7 Replacement standard 10 5 Boot operation ccccceseeeeeeeetees 4 7 11 13 C Circuit Fails SANG asen rarere peT Eessen EE 9 5 System design 9 3 9 4 Clock function ccccceseeceseeceseecesseeesseeesseeees 4 3 Constant SCAN ecserin 4 1 Control Method sekserne etureunasta 4 1 CPU Installation and removal ssessesseeseeeenen 9 14 P rOrmanCe e scceehesscuseccedsesei saseeseizesdasce 4 1 D DIN rail installation adapter AAA 9 11 Applicable AAA 9 11 Intervals of installation screws 9 11 E Extension Base E 6 2 Index 1 Cablen sna fet tiassasnaia atte a tenets 6 3 9 19 EE CN 2 4 6 7 External dimensions CPU module c cececeeeeeseeeee App 7 4 3 Base um App 9 6 1 Power supply mocdule App 7 5 1 G GX Developer A 12 H High Performance model QCPU A 12 1 1 I VO control mode ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeeeeaes 4 1 Installation and removal 9 9 Intelligent function module Direct deviece 4 3 LIM he teehee ee ee See 2 6 Internal current CONSUMPTION
252. ntents of the program 2 Check of trouble Check to see how the operating condition of the PLC varies while the PLC is operated as follows 1 Set the RUN STOP switch to STOP 2 Reset the trouble with the RESET L CLR switch 3 Turn ON and OFF the power supply 3 Reduction in area Estimate the troubled part in accordance with items 1 and 2 above 1 PLC or external devices 2 WO module or others 3 Sequence program 11 1 11 1 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 Troubleshooting The trouble investigating methods contents of troubles for the error codes and remedies of the troubles are described below 11 2 1 Troubleshooting flowchart The following shows the contents of the troubles classified into a variety of groups according to the types of events Error occurrence description MODE LED off Proceed to Section 11 2 2 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is not turned on Proceed to Section 11 2 3 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is flickering MODE LED flickering Proceed to Section 11 2 4 Flowchart for when the POWER LED is turned off POWER LED off Proceed to Section 11 2 5 AAR Flowchart for when the RUN LED is turned off Proceed to Section 11 2 6 ESA When the RUN LED is flickering Proceed to Section 11 2 7 Flowchart for when the ERR LED is on flickering ERR LED on flickering
253. number of points currently set for ST devices T umber of Stores the number of points currently set for C devices located for C contents 11 75 11 75 al N D291 zj o D292 Glo o D293 z o o D294 Sg zeg zox zeg zeg zZ ke ke KEES Z ne Di 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Set D Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation y ACPU Gedeelt When set Dal Number of poin F Device Ge Stores the number of points currently set for D devices allocated for D allocation DEER umber of points 7 es Same as p e Stores the number of points currently set for W devices S Initial allocated for W parameter Number of points allocated for SW contents Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices Reserves the designated time for communication processing with GX Developer or other units The greater the value is designated the shorter the response time for communication with other devices GX Developer serial communication units becomes Setting range 1 to 100 ms If the designated value is out of the range above it is assumed to no setting U END processing reserved for Time reserved for communicat communication processing No of modules D340 O Of modul Indicates the number of modules installed on Ethernet installed O No Ethernet I O No of the 1st module installed Etherne
254. nute are indicated on the CPU play Gerrard front LED display Clock data read OFF Ignored e Reads clock data to SD1025 to SD1028 in BCD when e The SM1029 relay is turned on using a sequence program to process all data communication requests Batch processing OFF Batch processing not ae during one scan in the END processing of that M9029 SM1029 of data d conducted The batch processing of the data communication communications ON Batch processing k Ser St requests can be turned on and off during running q The default is OFF processed one at a time for each END processing in the order in which data communication requests are accepted seconds 0 05 1 seconds 005 ___ T 05 e 0 1 second 0 2 second 1 second and 2 second clocks M9031 SM1031 0 2 second clock seconds oT are generated e Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even 0 5 during scan if corresponding time has elapsed M9032 SM1032 1 second clock seconds 0 5 e Starts with off when PLC power supply is turned on or 1 M9033 SM1033 2 second clock seconds 1 seconds seconds CPU module reset is performed M9034 SM1034 11 53 11 53 Alternates between ON and OFF according to the seconds specified at SD414 Default n 30 7 e Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even seconds during scan if corresponding time has elapsed Starts with off when PLC power supply is turned on or CPU module reset is performed
255. o the QY22 load is long be careful since there may be a Load does Output module leakage current due to the line capacity not turn off Resistor Triac teak output eakage curren Example 1 Example 2 11 41 11 41 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 6 Special Relay List 11 42 Special relays SM are internal relays whose applications are fixed in the PLC For this reason they cannot be used by sequence programs in the same way as the normal internal relays However they can be turned ON or OFF as needed in order to control the CPU module and remote I O modules The headings in the table that follows have the following meanings e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user in sequence program or test operation at a GX Developer S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt Indicated only if setting is done by system Set by When set Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error is generated Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc e Indicates special relay M9 C corresponding to the ACPU Correspo
256. odic excessive noise If no Depending on response time setting noise is effects are produced by the above take basic imported as input actions to prevent excessive noise form entering e g avoid bundling the power and I O cables and suppress noise by adding surge absorbers to such noise sources as relays and conductors used with the same power supply False input due to noise Example 6 11 39 11 39 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q lt Calculation example of Example 4 gt QX40 Leakage current 2 33mA If a switch with an LED display Input module je connected to QX40 and current of 2 33 mA is leaked 24VDC Voltage Vtg across the terminal and common base is VTB 2 33 MA X5 6 kQ 13 V Ignore the voltage drop caused by the LED Because the condition for the OFF voltage lt 11 V is not satisfied the input does not turn off To correct this connect a resistor as shown below QX40 H Input impedance 5 6kQ H zeie 24VDC Calculation of current for resistor R The voltage of QX40 across the terminals must be reduced to 11 V or less The required current 24 11 V 4 7 kQ 2 77 mA Therefore resistor R of flowing current of 2 77 mA or more must be connected Calculation of resistance of connected resistor R 11 V R gt 2 77 mA Sat 11 V R gt 2 77 1 96 mA 11 V 0 81 mA gt R 13 6 kQ gt R Resistance of the connected resistor R is obtai
257. oes ON when access is made outside the range of file registers R of memory card B Set within END processing e Reset at user program Memory card B SM673 jfile register access range flag OFF Within access range ON Outside access range 6 Instruction Related Special Relays dials SS OFF Carry OFF SM700 Carry flag ON Carry ON Number of output characters selection e Carry flag used in application instruction Instruction execution e When SM701 is OFF 16 characters of ASCII code are output When SM701 is ON output conducted until NUL 00H code of ASCII code is encountered OFF 16 characters output ON Outputs until NUL MELSEC Q Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A OFF Search next e Designates method to be used by search instruction N SM702 ce ON 2 part search e Data must be arranged for 2 part search B ow OFF Ascending order The sort instruction is used to designate whether data SM703 Sort order 8 g should be sorted in ascending order or in descending ON Descending order order Non match found All match S Instruction execution Goes ON when all data conditions have been met for the Block comparison BKCMP instruction Selection of real number e When SM707 is OFF real number instructions are processed at high speed instruction e When it is ON real number instructions are processed processing type with high accuracy SHK ee Conditions priority e Remains as originally set wh
258. ogram currently being executed is stored as BIN value Program number of low speed program currently being executed is stored as BIN value e Enabled only when SM510 is ON Current scan time is stored into SD520 SD521 Measurement is made in 100s increments SD520 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD521 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Example Current scan time 23 6ms is stored as indicated below SD520 23 SD521 600 Scan time of initial execution program is stored into SD522 SD523 Measurement is made in 100s increments SD522 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD523 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 e Minimum value of scan time with the exception of initial execution program scan time is stored into SD524 SD525 Measurement is made in 100us increments SD524 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD525 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Maximum value of scan time with the exception of initial execution program scan time is stored into SD526 SD527 Measurement is made in 100us increments SD526 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD527 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 e Current scan time of low speed program is stored into SD528 SD529 Measurement is made in 100s increments SD528 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD529 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900
259. om the public power distribution Because the PLC is an open device a device designed to be stored within another module be sure to use it after storing in the control box 1 Electrical shock prevention In order to prevent persons who are not familiar with the electric facility such as the operators from electric shocks the control box must have the following functions a The control box must be equipped with a lock so that only the personnel who has studied about the electric facility and have enough knowledge can open it b The control box must have a structure which automatically stops the power supply when the box is opened 2 Dustproof and waterproof features The control box also has the dustproof and waterproof functions Insufficient dustproof and waterproof features lower the insulation withstand voltage resulting in insulation destruction The insulation in our PLC is designed to cope with the pollution level 2 so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or below Pollution level 1 An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist Pollution level 2 An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust Generally this is the level for inside the control box equivalent to IP54 in acontrol room or on the floor of a typical factory Pollution level 3 An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may
260. on The CPU module battery is faulty 10 8 Bit 1 or 2 on Memory card A battery is faulty Completion 10 8 Refer to Section 10 3 2 1 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This section describes the various types of trouble that occur when the system is operated and causes and remedies of these troubles 11 1 Troubleshooting Basics In order to increase the reliability of the system not only highly reliable devices are used but also the speedy startup of the system after the occurrence of trouble becomes an important factor To start up the system speedily the cause of the trouble must be located and eliminated correctly The basic three points that must be followed in the troubleshooting are as follows 1 Visual inspection Visually check the following 1 Movement of sequencer stopped condition operating condition 2 Power supply on off 3 Status of input output devices 4 Power supply module CPU module I O module intelligent function module installation condition of extension cable 5 Status of wiring I O cables cables 6 Display status of various types of indicators POWER LED RUN LED ERR LED I O LED 7 Status of setting of various types of set switches Setting of No of stages of extension base unit power interrupt hold on status After confirming items 1 to 7 connect the GX Developer and check the operating conditions of the PLC and the co
261. on These special registers are all set by the system and users cannot use them to set program data Users who need to set data with these registers should edit the special registers for the Q QnA However before conversion users could set data at special registers D9200 to D9255 only and after conversion users can also set data at registers 1200 to 1255 For more detailed information concerning the contents of the ACPU special registers see the individual CPU users manual and the MELSECNET and MELSECNET B data link system reference manual Supplemental explanation on Special Register for Modification column For the device numbers for which a special register for modification is specified modify it to the special register for QCPU QnACPU For the device numbers for which is specified special register after conversion can be used Device numbers for which XX is specified do not function for QCPU QnACPU Special Register List ACPU Special Special d h F Corresponding Special Register after Register for Name Meaning Details CPU Conversion Conversion Modification When fuse blown modules are detected the lowest number of detected units is stored in hexadecimal Example When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules have blown 50 is stored in hexadecimal adden To monitor the number by peripheral devices perform D9000 D1000 Fuse blown module with 8 8 blown fuse monitor operation given in hexadecimal Cle
262. on When Set e Initial value is set at ON or OFF depending on parameters e When this relay is OFF all execution status are cleared from time SFC program was stopped starts from the initial step of block where the start request was made S Initial e When this relay is ON starts from execution block and U execution step active at time SFC program was stopped ON is enabled only when resumptive start has been designated at parameters SM902 is not automatically designated for latch e When this relay is OFF transition occurs at one scan one step for all blocks e When this relay is ON transition occurs continuously for all blocks in one scan In designation of individual blocks priority is given to the continuous transition bit of the block Designation is checked when block starts e When continuous transition is effective goes ON when continuous transition is not being executed goes OFF when continuous transition is being executed e Normally ON when continuous transition is not effective When block stops selects active step operation output e All coil outputs go OFF when this relay is OFF Coil outputs are preserved when this relay is ON Selects the device status when the stopped CPU is run M9102 format change Instruction execution S Initial msia U i See S Status change after the sequence program or SFC program has been modified when the SFC program exists Selects the outp
263. on base unit specifications Type not requiring power supply module Number of I O modules 2 5 installed Possibility of extension Extendable Applicable module 5 VDC erna current 0 080A 0 100A consumption S T T DIN rail mounting DIN 4 Extension base unit specifications Power supply loaded type T Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B QA1S65B QA1S68B e Number of I O modules installed ae ae a ee Possibility of Extendable OECTA Applicable module module Q series modules AnS series modules HE geg 0 110A 0 114A 0 121A 0 117A 0 118A consumption M4 screw hole or 4 5 hole M5 screw hole or 5 5 hole Mounting hole size a el M4 screw m M5 screw 88mm assinch 3 86inch 130mm 6 12inch 5 12inch 189mm 245mm 328mm 439mm 315mm 420mm 7 44inch 9 65inch 12 92inch 17 30inch 12 41inch 16 55inch 44 1mm 1 74inch 51 2mm 2 02inch Weight 0 23kg 0 25 kg 0 35 kg 0 45 kg 0 75 kg 1 00 kg Mounting screw M4 x 14 4 pieces Mounting screw M5 x 25 Attachment DIN rail mounting adapter sold separately 4 pieces ee Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1 Adapter type 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 2 Extension Cable Specification Table The list below shows the specifications of the extension cables which can be used for the High Performance model QCPU system cone QC05B QCO06B QC30B QC50B QC100B Cable length 0 45m 1 48ft 0 6m 1 97ft 1 2m 3 93ft 3 0m 9 84ft 5 0m 16 39ft 10 0m 32 79ft
264. on link OFF No trigger SM1532 Block 13 when the data is transmitted by M1533 specification ON Trigger SM1533 Block 14 the data tracking instruction M1534 SM1534 Block 15_ S TRUCK M1535 SM1535 M1536 SM1536 M1537 SM1537 M1538 SM1538 M1539 SM1539 M1540 SM1540 M1541 SM1541 M1542 SM1542 M1543 SM1543 M1544 SM1544 M1545 SM1545 1 Host system CPU information is stored 11 59 11 59 11 Number M1546 M1547 M1548 M1549 M1550 M1551 M1552 M1553 M1554 M1555 M1556 M1557 M1558 M1559 M1560 M1561 M1562 M1563 M1564 M1565 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued Name Meaning planation Set by ACPU Applicable When Set mM OOO CPU Ex SM1558 SM1559 SM1560 SM1561 Block 42 SM1562 Block 43 SM1563 SM1564 SM1565 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B lock 28 lock 29 lock 30 lock 31 lock 32 lock 33 lock 34 lock 35 lock 36 lock 37 lock 38 lock 39 lock 40 lock 41 Data tracking transmission link OFF No trigger ON Trigger e Specified the blocks to trigger when the data is transmitted by the data tracking instruction specification M1566 S TRUCK M1567 M1568 M1569 M1570 M1571 M1572 M1573 M1574 M1575 M1576 M1577 M1578 M1579 M1580 M1581 M1582 M1583 SM1566 SM1567 SM1568 SM1569 SM1570 SM1571 SM1572 SM1573 SM1574 SM1575 SM1576 SM1577 SM1578 SM1579 SM1580 SM1581 SM1582 SM1583 e Turns on when could not be executed nor
265. on module device 8 3 4 Effects of quicker access to the special function module and countermeasures against them 9 PARAMETER LIST 10 DEVICES 10 1 Device List 10 2 Internal User Devices 10 2 1 Inputs X 10 2 2 Outputs Y 10 2 3 Internal relays M 10 2 4 Latch relays L 10 2 5 Anunciators F 10 2 6 Edge relay V 10 2 7 Link relays B 10 2 8 Link special relays SB 10 2 9 Step relays S 10 2 10 Timers T 10 2 11 Counters C 10 2 12 Data registers D 10 2 13 Link registers W 10 2 14 Link special registers SW 10 3 Internal System Devices 10 3 1 Function devices FX FY FD 10 3 2 Special relays SM 10 3 3 Special registers SD 10 4 Link Direct Devices lu 10 5 Intelligent Function Module Devices Ut 09 10 6 Index Registers Z 10 6 1 Switching between scan execution type programs and low speed execution type programs 10 6 2 Switching between scan low speed execution programs and interrupt fixed scan execution type programs 10 7 File Registers R 10 7 1 File register capacity 10 7 2 Differences in memory card access method by memory card type 10 7 3 Registering the file registers 10 7 4 File register designation method 10 7 5 Precautions in using file registers 10 8 Nesting N 10 9 Pointers 10 9 1 Local pointers 10 9 2 Common pointers 10 10 Interrupt Pointers I 10 11 Other Devices 10 11 1 SFC block device BL 10 11 2 SFC transition device TR 10 11 3 Network No designation device J 10 11 4 I O No de
266. on module peripheral devices A1SD61 A1SD75P1 S3 etc AD75TU 2 2 Select the power supply module also in consideration of the current consumption of the peripheral devices connected to the special function module For example when the AD75TU is connected to the A1SD75P1 S3 the current consumption of the AD75TU must also be taken into account 5 1 3 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power supply Be sure of the following terms when connecting the High Performance model QCPU system to the uninterruptive power supply abbreviated as UPS hereafter Use a UPS which employs the constant inverter power supply method with 5 or less voltage fluctuation Do not use a UPS with the constant commercial power supply method 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 2 Names of Parts and Settings MELSEC Q The names of the parts of each power supply module are described below 1 Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P Q64P Q61SP 1 HELSEC Q81P A1 100 120VAC 50 60Hz 105VA OUTPUT 5VDC 6A a 2 2avoc osa LY oo Q H 3 Bes 4 Set S 10 IN Q61P A1 HELSEG Q62P 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 105VA OUTPUT 5VDC 3A 24VDC 0 6A a Zen pa vi 2 24G E E 24VDC 0 54 E rel W 3 ail i 4 De Op 12 A
267. onnect a surge protector circuit such as CR to the noise source Can RUN LED be turned on Completion 11 6 11 6 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 6 When the RUN LED is flickering If the RUN LED flickers follow the steps below The High Performance model QCPU flickers the RUN LED when the RUN STOP switch is set from STOP to RUN after the programs or parameters are written in the CPU module during the stoppage Though this is not the trouble with the CPU module the operation of the CPU module is stopped To bring the CPU module into RUN status reset the CPU module with the RESET L CLR or set the RUN STOP switch again from STOP to RUN The RUN LED turns on 11 2 7 Flowchart for when the ERR LED is on flickering 11 7 The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the ERR LED of the CPU module turns on or flickers at PLC power on at operation start or during operation ERR LED is on flickering Confirm details of error by GX Developer Refer to Section 11 3 Hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Set the RUN STOP switch to STOP Modify error details Refer to Section 11 3 Reset by the RESET L CLR switch Set the RUN STOP switch to RUN Can the ERR LED be turned off Completion 11 7 11 TROUBLESHO
268. oopback implemented in forward reverse directions Loopback implemented only in forward direction Loopback implemented only inreverse direction Data link disabled Stores the present path status of the data link e Data link in forward loop Master station Forward loop e Data link in reverse loop Reverse loop 5 Forward loop Reverse loop 11 93 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Details Conversion Conversion Modification e Loopback in forward reverse loops 0 Forward loop i ester i i during data link MESSE 1 Reverse loop eins during data link rg 2 Loopback Forward loopback Reverse loopback implemented in e Loopback in forward loop only forward reverse gt H Station 3 station n D9204 SD1204 Link status doctors 1 i i 3 Loopback teens tol los implemented only S52 So Bee SS in forward Forward loopback direction Loopback in reverse loop only 4 Loopback implemented only i inreverse direction Data link disabled tie knit be Reverse loopback Stores the local or remote I O station number at which loopback is being executed Station Station that D1205 implementing implemented forward i P gt 8 loopback loopback L Wie EE eet Se et ee ed lt a Forward loopback Reverse loopback In the example of above figure 1 is stored into Station Station that D1205 and
269. oot operation file stored in the memory card Write a file to the memory card Is it able to perform boot operation Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description P 9 H Completion of the problem 11 15 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 16 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs The following shows the flowchart to be followed when UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs at PLC power on or during operation UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs Check the slot where error occurred with the GX Developer Is the module of the applicable slot installed properly Install the module properly YES NO Is the ERR LED YES turned off Are all the extension cables of the base module connected properly Install the extension cable properly YES NO Is the ERR LED YES turned off P i Replace the applicable module EE Error detection P Replace the CPU module Oper operation Error detection Replace the applicable Proper operation base unit Error detection Hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Completion 11 16 11 16 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 17 Flowchart for wnen CONTROL BUS ERR occurs The following shows the flowchart to be followed when C
270. op At power ON Reset MULTI EXE ERROR Unit module No Off At power ON Reset MULTI CPU ERROR Unit module No On On 9000 Feie ok 6 Program error location Annunciator number Coninue Wren insvuctoniseeoued instruction is executed USER LED On 9010 lt CHK gt SCH Program error location Failure No Conia When instruction is executed ek ak ak ak USER LED On E See i a aie 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x 3 Can only be detected in a redundant system Can be detected either in the control system or the standby system x 4 Can only be detected in the control system of a redundant system x 5 Can only be detected in the standby system of a redundant system 6 7 xx indicates detected annunciator number xe indicates detected contact and coil number 11 35 11 35 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres Error Code ai SDO x 1 Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action Because this is a CPU module hardware error contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative To replace the module replace the standby system CPU first then the control system CPU 6101 KEE module detected an error during the handshake for Check the condition of the other stations 6200 The standby system in a redundant system is switched to the Check the control system condition control system Q4AR The control system in a redundant system is switched to t
271. ore wiring space If the cable sheath is susceptible to damage caused by a structural object or part on the left side of the module take a protective measure with spiral tube or a similar insulator x3 80 mm 3 15 inch mm or more for the connector type 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 3 MELSEC Q Module mounting orientation a Since the PLC generates heat it should be mounted on a well ventilated location in the orientation shown below Vertical Flat Installation surface Mount the base unit on a flat surface If the mounting surface is not even this may strain the printed circuit boards and cause malfunctions Installation of unit in an area where the other devices are installed Avoid mounting base unit in proximity to vibration sources such as large magnetic contractors and no fuse circuit breakers mount these on a separate panel or at a distance Distances from the other devices In order to avoid the effects of radiated noise and heat provide the clearances indicated below between the PLC and devices that generate noise or heat contactors and relays e Required clearance in front of PLC ai least 100 mm 8 94 inch e Required clearance on the right and leftof PLC at least 50 mm 1 97 inch t least 50mm 1 97 inch 1 97 inch 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 3 3 Installation and removal of module This section explains how to install and remove a power supply CPU I O in
272. other They should be installed 100 mm 3 94 inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation When controlling items like lamp load heater or solenoid valve using an output module large current approximately ten times greater than that present in normal circumstances may flow when the output is turned OFF to ON Take measures such as replacing the module with one having sufficient rated current INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in this manual Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation and damage to or deterioration of the product Hold down the module loading lever at the module bottom and securely insert the module fixing latch into the fixing hole in the base unit Incorrect loading of the module can cause a malfunction failure or drop When using the PLC in the environment of much vibration tighten the module with a screw Tighten the screw in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module When installing extension cables be sure that the connectors of base unit are installed correctly After installation check them for looseness Poor connections
273. otice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi general purpose programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or National Defense purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications Note that even with these applications if the user approves that the application is to be limited and a special quality is not required application shall be possible When considering use in aircraft medical applications railways incineration and fuel devices manned transport devices equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices in which human life or assets could be greatly affected and for which a particularly high reliability is required in terms of safety and control system please consult with Mitsubishi and discuss the required specifications A MITSUBISHI
274. ous control when the power is turned on is the previous control system S Initial New system latch latch mode mode Start mode when CPU OFF Initial start e Turns on when the CPU operation mode is hot start when a CPU is started ON Hot start the redundant system is actually start up CPU is switched ON Hot start operation is switched for a redundant system 1515 Output hold mode So ss Jeitz ON Output hold output hold Each END SM1516 Operation system e Turns on when the CPU operation system status is the status ON Standby system standby system change OFF Power supply on startup Turns on when the CPU is started up by the operation ON Operation system switch system switch je Reset using the user program starup S Status change U a Se be Q 0 Le om a 9 a e ne o a 5 ao e When turned off when the tracking memory is in use during OFF Dalat operation END standby is executed until execution is possible mode moge e When turned on when the tracking memory is being used ON i C rtyover m de during END this is repeatedly executed until the next END M1520 SM1520 M1521 SM1521 M1522 SM1522 M1523 SM1523 M1524 SM1524 M1525 SM1525 M1526 SM1526 M1527 SM1527 New smisig 1120kKing execution M1528 SM1528 M1529 SM1529 Block 10 M1530 SM1530 Block 11 M1531 SM1531 Block12 je ifi i Data tracking Block 12 _ Specified the blocks to trigger M1532 transmissi
275. out with the following procedures a Operation with GX Developer setting automatic write to standard ROM 1 Check the Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM item in the PLC parameter boot file setting Set the parameter and program to be booted at the Boot file setting section Set the Transfer from to Standard ROM Qn H Parameter x PLC name Puc system Puc file Puc RAS Device Program Boot file ke o assignment Check Auto Download all Data from Memory card to pose Standard ROM I Clear program memory System area assured steps p K steps 0 15K step I Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM Set the Transfer from to Standard ROM r Boot file setting aaa type Dataname Transfer tom ZT Transferto l El Program MAIN Parameter PARAM Standard ROM e Program memory MAINT Sequence MAIN Standard ROM Program memory E Device com Sequence MAINT Standard ROM Program memory COMME Ee El Parameter Insert Delete Acknowledge XY assignment lv Default Check End Cancel 2 Store the set parameters and programs to be booted in the memory card 4 8 4 8 Aultiple PLC settings 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q b Operations with CPU module automatic write to standard ROM 1 Switch OFF the power supply to the PLC 2 Mount the memory card that contains the pa
276. parameter is set when a QA1SLB or e parameters e igh speed interrupts change No B is used A y S SE A A 3 To use either the QA1SLIB or QALB delete the setting of the 04012 4 No module is installed at the I O address designated by the high high A T high speed interrupt parameter hig aie raya t parameter o use hig speed interrupts do or later 4 Re examine the I O address designated by the high speed interrupt parameter Re set the parameter I O assignment to control them under one 3009 A modules are set to control PLCs in a multiple CPU system QCPU Change the parameters of all stations in the multiple CPU system 3010 The parameter set number of CPU modules differs from the actual Match preset count of multiple PLC setting CPU empty setting number in a multiple CPU system in UO assignment with the actual number of CPUs loaded 3012 Multiple CPU setting or control PLC setting differs from that of the Match the multiple PLC setting or control CPU setting in the QCPU reference station in a multiple CPU system parameter with that of the reference station station 1 Eh Multiple CPU automatic refresh setting is any of the followings in a Wes E multiple CPU system Check the following in the multiple CPU automatic refresh or later i ice i ifi i parameters and make correction f 1 nen apito multiple Seale socio io device a aia ine 1 When specifying the bit device specify a multiple of 16 for the device o refresh
277. per YES communicate with the GX Developer by replacing the connection cable Is the USB driver installed in the personal computer Install the USB driver into the personal computer Is the connection type RS 232 an the CPU communicat with the GX Developer Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Can the CPU Communicate with GX Developer by lowering the baud rate YES Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative y explaining a detailed description Completion of the problem 11 12 11 12 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN See MELSEC Q 11 2 14 Flowchart for when unable to write a program The following shows the flowchart to be followed when programs cannot be written in the CPU module Unable to write a program Is the DIP switch SW1 set to OFF ON Turn the DIP switch SW1 system protect to OFF ork NO YES Is it able to write a program YES Cancel the password using the GX Developer NO Is the password registered NO Is it able to write a program Perform the following ve Confirm whether the write protect switch is off or not Confirm if it is formatted Confirm the writing destination specification Is the memory program memory Program memory
278. ply Module Q61SP F MELSEC mr o POWER INPUT Q61SP 100 240VAC SE AN Es ei o E 90 3 54 14 27 4 1 08 Unit mm inch App 8 App 8 APPENDICES 4 Power Supply Module A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P A MELSEC Q 6 5 0 26 App 9 w 130 5 12 MELSEC A een 93 6 3 69 POWER MITSUBISHI O INPUT OUTPUT 100 240VAC DC 5V 5A 105VA 50 60Hz 54 5 2 15 Unit mm inch App 9 APPENDICES APPENDIX 2 3 Main base unit 1 Main Base Unit Q33B E screws M4 x14 T o c z A z D S E f A A i eh Eie WP Ey Uy Zo i ih u olo 4 wl Hy qe CO Fpl Qo bows Sa roo Lenz LO T amp gL O V o 0 7 0 28 y 0 61 189 7 44 7 5 0 30 44 1 1 74 155 169 0 3 6 65 0 01 Ne 2 Main Base Unit Q35B 4 mountiong screws M4 x14 ane rh Al Ay A TERIER UI a LEY Fees cru dd moot Lea S 98 3 86
279. power failure compensation range Remote RUN PAUSE contact Year month day hour minute second day of the week leap year automatic distinction Clock function Accuracy 3 18 to 5 25s TYP 2 12s d at 0 C Accuracy 3 93 to 5 25s TYP 1 90s d at 25 C Accuracy 14 69 to 3 53s TYP 3 67s d at 55 C Allowable momentary power failure period Varies according to the type of power supply module 5VDC internal current consumption 0 60A 0 64A 0 64A 0 64A 0 64A 98mm 3 86inch External dimensions 27 4mm 1 08inch 89 3mm 3 52inch ommes o O 020g aa ozog aa vam 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 2 Part Names and Settings This section explains the part names and settings of the module With front cover open Front face P 9 d F 10 JL 13 14 15 11 1 12 When opening the front cover put your finger here Side face 16 i x1 Not provided for Q02CPU 4 4 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q Application Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit Single motion installation Indicates the mode of the CPU module 2 Mode LED ON green
280. problem Using the multiple CPU dedicated instruction completion bit provide interlocks to prevent one CPU module from executing 32 or more multiple CPU dedicated instructions Set the numbers of execution to the CC Link instruction to 64 or less Execute the CC Link instruction after setting the CC Link parameter Read the common error information at a peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem Read the common error information at a peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem Read the common error information at a peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 32 11 32 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LED s Operating r T feo Ge Error Messages Information Information LED eas Statuses of Diagnostic Timing 2 SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 x 1 ERROR CPU 4202 4203 FOR NEXT ERROR Program error location Off Flicker Stop When instruction is executed 4210 4211 __ CAN T EXECUTE P Program error location Off Flicker Stop When instruction is executed 4212 4213 4220 4221 CAN T EXECUTE I Program error lo
281. r ERC e The first annunciator number to be detected is stored here Instruction D9009 number number A execution S D63 Number o Number of Stores the number of annunciators searched Instruction D9124 annunciators annunciators execution Error Error Error S 11 69 11 69 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding t Name Meaning Explanation Deeg ACPU en DUT When F goes ON due to OUT F or SET EL the F numbers which Number SD64 D9125 go progressively ON from SD64 through SD79 are registered SD65 F numbers turned OFF by RST F are deleted from SD64 to SD79 D9126 and are shifted to the data register following the data register where SD66 the deleted F numbers had been stored D9127 Execution of the LEDR instruction shifts the contents of SD64 to SD67 SD79 up by one D9128 This can also be done by using the INDICATOR RESET switch on eee the of the Q3A Q4ACPU D9129 ten After 16 annunciators have been detected detection of the 17th will D9130 not be stored from SD64 through SD79 SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET SD70 F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110F151F210LEDR D9131 Table of A A A A A A A A A ee ee Kib SD71 EE Annunciator SD62 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
282. r example subprogram when main program is being run is complete during run Automatically switched off when P setting is complete CHG instruction OFF Enabled execution disable ON Disable SM1055 SM1056 SM1057 SM1058 SM1059 SM1060 11 54 11 54 Main side P set request OFF Other than when P set being requested ON P I set being requested Sub program 2 P set request Re Re Re Re Re Re D a a a a a a On a P E BR ES Ei Ki N Ed a BR N o N a a 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC O Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Meaning Details Relay Conversion Modification OFF Other than when P I set e Provides P set request after transfer of the other Sub program 3 P program for example subprogram when main program is SET set request being requested being run is complete during run Automatically switched ON Px bset being requested off when P I setting is complete SM1065 SM1066 Divided processing execution detection Divided processing request flag e Turned ON to shorten the search time in the A8UPU A8PUJre g A8UPU A8PUJ quired search OFF Read timenorshonened In this case the scan time is extended by 10 OFF Divided processing not e Turned on when canvas screen transfer to underway AD57 S1 AD58 is done by divided processing and ON
283. r making sure that the fixing screws have been removed completely 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 2 2 MELSEC Q 9 6 Wiring 9 6 1 The precautions on the wiring D DANGER Completely turn off the external power supply when installing or placing wiring Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product When turning on the power supply or operating the module after installation or wiring work be sure that the module s terminal covers are correctly attached Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock CAUTION Be sure to ground the FG terminals and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor Not doing so could result in electric shock or erroneous operation When wiring in the PLC be sure that it is done correctly by checking the product s rated voltage and the terminal layout Connecting a power supply that is different from the rating or incorrectly wiring the product could result in fire or damage External connections shall be crimped or pressure welded with the specified tools or correctly soldered Imperfect connections could result in short circuit fires or erroneous operation Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it could result in short circuits fire or erroneous operation Tightening the terminal screws too far may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circu
284. r of first module installed Group A e MELSECNET 10 H group number of first module installed number e MELSECNET 10 H station number of first module installed In the case of standby stations the module number of the standby station is stored 1 to 4 e Stores the upper two digits of the first UO number of an I O module that is removed replaced in the online status default value 100p MELSECNET 10 H information S Initial D242 D243 SD244 SD253 n Information from 2nd module E e Configuration is identical to that for the first module N n Information from 3rd module E e Configuration is identical to that for the first module OH n Information from 4th module OO e Configuration is identical to that for the first module ie g ie N R 11 74 11 74 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding g Set by Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation When set ACPU pL I T When Xn0 of the installed CC Link goes ON the bit corresponding to the station switches ON When either Xn1 or XnF of the installed CC Link switch OFF the bit corresponding to the station switches ON Switches ON when the CPU module cannot communicate with the installed CC Link Information Information Information a of 8 of z GAO S Soe B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 Bo New Remote Vacant 1st module 2nd module i Error detection 3rd module SD280
285. r system monitor Does the output number match NO a Change the output number j YES Is the LED turned on when another output module is forcibly turned on NO YES CPU module base unit extension NO cable hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Is the LED turned on when the output module is changed for another output module which is then forcibly turned on YES Output module hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 11 10 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN EE MELSEC Q 11 2 12 Flowchart for when output load of output module does not turn on The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the output load of the output module does not turn on during PLC operation The output load does not turn on Is the operation indicator of output module turned on NO Check output conditions with the monitor mode of the GX Developer YES Is voltage for the power supply load added Is the operation indicator of input module turned on Off Voltage measurement among the modules input and COM terminals OV hat is the voltag among the various output COM terminals of the output module Set the GX Developer in the monitor mode and
286. race ch Step trace starts OFF Suspend e When this goes ON step trace is started S P ON Start e Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF ch Step trace Goes ON when step trace execution is underway S Goes OFF at completion or suspension ch CO N N D X lt ba el E oO a underway Goes ON if even 1 block within the step trace being executed is triggered Goes OFF when step trace is commenced Goes ON if all blocks within the step trace being s executed are triggered ch Goes OFF when step trace is commenced SMB25 Step OFF Not completed Goes ON at step trace completion S tracecompleted ON End Goes OFF when step trace is commenced ch f A 7 S OFF Normal e Switches ON if error occurs during execution of trace ch S ch After step trace OFF Not after trigger trigger ON Is after first trigger After Step trace OFF Is not after all triggers SE trigger ON Is after all triggers n n n n co o N eg ch CH n kd 2 SM827 Status latch error OFS Some Goes ON if error occurs during execution of status latch ON Errors ch Status M9182 format ange change Status ange ange ER New ange Status ange M9181 New Status M9180 ange ange Sampling trace JON Errors Goes ON if error occurs during execution of sampling S Status New error trace change ange Program trace OFF Normal Goes ON if error occurs during exec
287. rameters and programs to be booted onto the CPU module 3 Set the parameter s valid drive in the mounted memory card with the CPU module s dip switches e When a SRAM card is mounted SW2 ON SW3 OFF e When a Flash card ATA card is mounted SW2 OFF SW3 ON 4 Switch on the power supply to the PLC 5 BOOT LED will flicker when automatic write to standard ROM has been completed and the CPU module will assume a suspension error status 6 Switch OFF the power supply to the PLC 7 Remove the memory card and then set the parameter s valid drive in the standard ROM with the CPU module s dip switches e Standard ROM SW2 ON SW3 ON c The parameters and programs will be booted from the standard ROM to the program memory when the PLC is switched on to enable actual operations 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 1 Specification 5 1 1 Power supply module specifications This section gives the specifications of the power supply modules item 10 10 10 30 Dee 100 to 120VAC eet 200 to 240VAC mo IO to 240VAC so 24VDC es 85 to 132VAC 170 to 264VAC 85 to 264VAC 15 6 to 31 2VDC lInputfrequency LI CC i OGOHIZ HHH COT Within 5 refer to section 5 1 3 fe oo o Max input apparent power 1 ODA le Max inputpower PT Rated output current EE EE External output voltage Le LL weca Le l Overcurrent 6 6A or more 3 3A or more 6 6A or more 5 protection 1 oun IL
288. redundant systems and refresh cannot be done when in the separate mode When a standalone system SD1600 to SD1699 are all 0 Corresponding i Number Name Meaning Explanation Be ACPU ER SDLL 2 gt e Stores as BIN code the error code of the error that occurred i Diagnosis error 8 i a 1600 Diagnosis error during the other system CPU diagnosis SD code e Stores the latest error currently occurring SD1601 A 7 e SD1600 stores the updated date and time SD1602 Diagnosis edor Diagnosis error e Stores each of the BCD two digits occurrence S pisos lime occurrence time Refer to SD1 to SD3 for the storage status SD1 SD1601 SD2 gt SD1602 SD3 gt SD1603 Error Error e Stores the error comment information individual information SD1604_ information information classification code classification _ classification e Refer to SD4 for the storage status e Stores the common information for the error code e Refer to SD5 to SD15 for the storage status Error common Error common SD5 SD1605 SD6 gt SD1606 SD7 SD1607 information information SD8 SD1608 SD9 gt SD1609 SD10 gt SD1610 SD11 gt S8SD1611 SD12 gt SD1612 SD13 gt SD1613 SD14 gt SD1614 SD15 gt SD1615 D1618 D1619 D1620 SD16 to SD26 for the storage status Ge E Or individual Error individual SD16 SD1616 SD17 SD1617 SD18 gt SD1618 S Each eae information information SD19 SD1619 SD20 D1620 SD21 16
289. removal QCPU 11 80 S Status change S Status change S Initial DT 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN E MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU SCH S DI Indicates memory card B models installed B8 B7 B4 B3 BO R Q2A S1 Memory card Memory card Drive 1 0 Does not exist Px Q3A gt S Initial New B models B models An owe 1 SRAM cogan Q4A Dive 0 Does not exist Q4AR rive ey ROM model 2 EE ROM 3 Flash ROM St Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units QCPU SD622 Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A Q4AR Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units S Initial Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A Q4AR The conditions for usage for drive 3 4 are stored as bit patterns In use when ON The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Not used a d Parameters QPA CPU fault history QFD Dive a use Dive 3A SES Device comments QCD SFC trace QTS SE SEET eonditigns Device initial value QDI Local device QDL change File R QDR Not used Trace QTS Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used SD624 The use conditions for memory card B are stored as bit patterns In use when ON The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Simulation data QDS Q2A S1 Memory card Memory card Parameters QPA CPU fault history QFD
290. reviations in the descriptions of the High Performance model QCPU unless otherwise specified Generic Term Abbreviation High Performance model General name for QOD2CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU QCPU modules Abbreviation for Mitsubishi MELSEC Q Series Programmable Logic Controller ER for small types of Mitsubishi MELSEC A Series Programmable Logic GX Developer General name for GX Developer Version 4 or later General name for Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B type main base unit with High Performance model QCPU and Q Series power supply module I O module and intelligent function module attachable General name for Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB slim type main base unit with High Performance model QCPU and slim type power supply module I O module and intelligent function module attachable and intelligent function module attachable Series power supply module I O module and intelligent function module attachable power supply module I O module and special function module attachable General name for Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B type main base unit with High Main base unit Performance model QCPU and Q Series power supply module I O module and intelligent function module attachable Sunnen General name for Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB slim type main base unit with High Slim type main base unit Performance model QCPU and slim type power supply module I O module and intelligent function module attachable Flash card General name for Q2MEM 2MBF and
291. ring execution of FROM TO 556 instruction set When an END instruction is 1411 At power ON At reset CONTROL BUS ERR Unit module No Program error location Flicker Stop During execution of FROM TO instruction set aia ee T CONTROL BUS ERR Unit module No Off Flicker ee Flicker pene END instruction is CONTROL BUS ERR When an END instruction is off Flicker Stop executed 1416 Unit module No At power ON At reset o es ECRSE ff on n 1530 DC DOWN 24V 3 1600 BATTERY ERROR Drive Name Continue Always 1601 BAT ALM LED On 1602 UNIT VERIFY ERR Unit module No 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 2 The CPU module operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 3 This can only be detected in redundant systems Detection is possible in either the control system or the standby system kA This can only be detected in the redundant system control system 5 6 Stop xl When an END instruction is Off On Flicker On oe executed This can be detected in either a standalone system or a redundant system However in a redundant system it can only be detected in the control system Stop continue operation is selectable for each module by setting parameters 11 21 11 21 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code SD0 x 1 Error Contents and Cause There was no response from the int
292. rites ON Does not write OFF Operative network MELSECNET 10 ON Standby network module 2 information OFF Operative network MELSECNET 10 ON Standby network module 3 information OFF Operative network MELSECNET 10 ON Standby network module 4 information OFF Normal ON Error 280 CC Link error Presenceabsene OFF SFC program absent ON SFC program present E D o e S n a O program Start stop SFC program OFF SFC program stop ON SFC program start SM252 SM254 SM321 11 45 ON Does not read OFF Reads ON Does not write ON Does not read ON Does not write ON Does not read ON Does not write After the head VO number of the I O module being replaced is set in SD251 is set on line O module replace ment is enabled when this relay is ON Only one module can be replaced at each setting To replace an I O module in the RUN status use the Q2A S1 program or a peripheral device to turn this relay ON to VEND PS Q3A replace an I O module in the STOP status turn this relay Q4A ON in the test mode of a peripheral device Q4AR e Do not switch between RUN and STOP status until 1 0 module replacement is completed OFF Replacement prohibited i WO change OK ON Replacement enabled Goes ON when I O replacement is OK S END Effective for the batch refresh also effective for the low speed cyclic Designate whether to receive arrival stations
293. ry status there is an error The specified file is processing the request from a different location he specified device No is outside the range heck the specified device No There is a mistake in the specified d L Ge Check the specified device qualification method qualification Writing cannot be done because the specified Do not write the data in the specified device and do not device is for system use turn on or off The request contents cannot be executed in the Do not conduct a request for a specified intelligent specified intelligent function module function module in which an error has occurred The access range exceeds the buffer memory Check the header address and access number of points range of the specified intelligent function and access using a range that exists in the intelligent module function module The specified intelligent function module cannot Check that the specified intelligent function module is be accessed operating normally The intelligent function module does not exist in Check the header I O No of the specified intelligent the specified position function module Check that there is no error in the intelligent function A control bus error has occurred e module or in the hardware of another module The setting required to conduct simulation has Se Conduct a simulation setting not been made The device header or number of points inthe Check the device header No or number of po
294. s held for a specified time For safety however replace the battery with a new one as early as possible The SM52 is energized when the battery causes a complete discharge error Immediately after the relay has been energized replace the battery with a new one Whichever voltage of the battery of the CPU module and SRAM card is lowered the SM51 and SM52 are energized To identify the specific battery of the memory of which voltage is lowered check the contents of the special resisters SD51 and SD52 When the voltage of the battery of each memory is lowered the bit corresponding to each of SD51 and SD52 memories is turned on Bit No of SD51 and SD52 CPU module Bit 1 2 SRAM card POINTS The relation between the backups of the memories preformed by the batteries which are installed on the CPU module and SRAM card is described below The items that must be considered are the following two points 1 The battery installed on the CPU module cannot backup the memory of the SRAM card 2 The battery installed on the SRAM card cannot backup the memory of the CPU module Power supply Battery of CPU Battery of Memory of CPU Memory of Module Module SRAM Card Module SRAM Card Connection Unconnection Connection Unconnection O Backup enable X Backup unable The standard service life and replacement procedures of the battery is described on the next page 10 4 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 3
295. s of the 1st module installed Be 3 fe a bei o D347 Error code Ethernet error code of the 1st module installed D34 Infi ion from 2 eae HEH Configuration is identical to that for the first module D354 D Inf ion f E e ee Configuration is identical to that for the first module D362 Inf ion from 4th a 8 to ee Configuration is identical to that for the first module 15 B8 B7 B6 B5 0 to 0 Not used L Instruction reception status of channel 1 Instruction reception status of channel 2 Ethernet Instruction reception status of channel 3 instruction Instruction reception L Instruction reception status of channel 4 S Initia Instruction reception status of channel 5 reception status of 1st module Instruction Se status of channel 6 status _________________ Instruction reception status of channel 7 Instruction reception status of channel 8 ON Received Channel is used OFF Not received Channel is not used nn nn 3 fe bei bi bg Si Si Si nn 3 fe a bg B4 B3 B2B1 BO 11 76 11 76 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding t Set b Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation When os ACPU SE g pI T Infi ion fi SD381 Normanton Tom Configuration is identical to that for the first module Ethernet 2nd module instruction Information from iti SD382 8 e Configuration is identical to that for
296. s proceeded by an END and correct the problem i aN instruction The program is automatically subjected to an initial start 4610 The active step information at presumptive start of an SFC program is incorrect 4611 Key switch was reset during RUN when presumptive start was designated for SFC program 4620 Startup was executed at a block in the SFC program that was already started up 4621 Startup was attempted at a block that does not exist in the SFC Read common error information at a peripheral device check error program step corresponding to its numerical value program error location 4630 Startup was executed at a block in the SFC program that was and correct the problem already started up Startup was attempted at a block that does not exist in an SFC 4631 program 4632 There were too many simultaneous active steps in blocks that can be designated by the SFC program 4633 There were too many simultaneous active steps in all blocks that can be designated Program scan time for initial execution type programs exceeds the initial execution WDT time setting designated in the PLC RAS Read the error individual information at a peripheral device check the numerical value time there and shorten scan time if 5001 The program scan time goes over the WDT value set in the necessary parameter PLC RAS parameter 1 The scan time of the program exceeded the constant scan 1 Review the constant scan setting time setting time specified in the
297. s shown below B15 to B12B11 to B8 B7 Friday R Example H0005 Always set 0 t Day of week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday 31st 10 a m Set by When set S U Request S U Request S U Request MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU DT D9038 D3039 format change T D9025 O Rem Corresponding CPU D9026 D9027 D9028 EE Remote i 11 73 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Set D Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation When Si ACPU pads be TT d SD220 e LED display ASCII data 16 characters stored here B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD221 7 SD220 15th character from the right 16th character from the right SD222 SD221 13th character from the right 14th character from the right SD223 LED display Display indicator SD222 11th character from the right 12th character from the right S When P New SD224 data data SD223 9th character from the right 10th character from the right changed Q SD224 7th character from the right 8th character from the right SD225 SD225 5th character from the right 6th character from the right SD226 3rd character from the right 4th character from the right SD226 SD227 1st character from the right 2nd character from the right a D227 0 Automatic mod
298. s the number of vacant blocks in the communications request S During on request area for remote terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32 S3 execution registration areas Patterns masked by use of the IMASK instruction are stored in the SD715 following manner IMASK B15 B1 BO SE D716 __ instruction Mask pattern D715 115 to 11 10 she execution mask pattern SD716 131 to 117 116 SD717 SD717 147 to 133 132 D718 See Accumulator Accumulator e For use as replacement for accumulators used in A series programs S U New P No P No oer S eae o Stores the program number of the program to be loaded by the designation designation S D720 PLOAD instruction when designated for PLOAD for PLOAD 3 8 e Designation range 1 to 124 instruction instruction No of vacant registration for CC S Duri SD730 RAI communication with the intelligent device station connected to During Link i y A 1S J61QBT61 execution Stores the number of vacant registration area for the request for communicati on request SD736 PKEY input PKEY input e Special register that temporarily stores keyboard data input by means S During New QnA of the PKEY instruction execution 11 82 11 82 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN E MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Number SD738 SR Stores the message designated by the MSG instruction
299. screws can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening of screws can cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER The online operations conducted for the CPU module being operated connecting the peripheral device especially when changing data or operation status shall be conducted after the manual has been carefully read and a sufficient check of safety has been conducted Operation mistakes could cause damage or problems with of the module Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so could cause trouble erroneous operation injury or fire Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS phone more than 25cm 9 85 inch away from the PLC Not doing so can cause a malfunction Switch all phases of the external power supply off before mounting or removing the module If you do not switch off the external power supply it will cause failure or malfunction of the module Do not drop or give an impact to the battery installed in the module Otherwise the battery will be broken possibly causing internal leakage of electrolyte Do not use but dispose of the battery if it has fallen or an impact is given to it DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste REVISIONS x The manual number is given on the bottom left of t
300. signation device U 10 11 5 Macro instruction argument device VD 10 12 Constants 10 12 1 Decimal constants K 10 12 2 Hexadecimal constants H 10 12 3 Real numbers E 10 12 4 Character string 10 13 Convenient Uses for Devices 10 13 1 Global devices amp local devices 10 13 2 Device initial values 11 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU PROCESSING TIME 11 1 Reading High Performance model QCPU s Scan Time 11 2 Factors Responsible for Extended Scan Time Factors Responsible for Shortened Scan Time 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU 12 1 Writing Procedure for 1 Program 12 1 1 Items to consider when creating one program 12 1 2 Procedure for writing programs to the High Performance model QCPU 12 2 Procedure for Multiple Programs 12 2 1 Items to consider when creating multiple programs 12 2 2 Procedure for writing programs to the High Performance model QCPU 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEMS 13 1 Features 13 2 Outline of Multiple CPU Systems 13 3 Differences with Single CPU Systems 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEMS 14 1 System Configuration 14 2 Precautions During Multiple CPU System Configuration 14 2 1 Function versions of High Performance model QCPU motion CPUs and PC CPU module that can be sued and their mounting positions 14 2 2 Precautions when using Q series corresponding I O modules and intelligent function modules 14 2 3 Limitations when mounting AnS series corresponding I O mod
301. sions 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q Performance Specifications Item Q61SP Base loading position Slim type power supply module loading slot Applicable base unit Q30SB 10 100 to 240VAC Input power supply 15 85 to 264VAC Within 5 refer to section 4 3 1 Rated output 2A current 24VDC Overcurrent 2 2A or more protection 1 Overvoltage 5 5 to 6 5V protection 2 24VDC Efficiency PO or mee SES or more All fail owWabe momentary power failure Within 20ms period 3 Across inputs LG and outputs FG 2830VAC rms 3 cycles 2000 m 6562 ft Across inputs and outputs LG and FG separated across inputs and LG FG across outputs Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance and FG LG 10M9 or more by insulation resistance tester e By noise simulator of 1500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise Noise durability frequency e Noise voltage IEC61000 4 4 2kV Operation indication LED indication lit at 5VDC output Built in Unchangeable by user ERR contact contact switched off opened normally closed contact at an error stop of CPU module for CPU module operating status output R I ated switching voltage 24VDC 0 5A Geer Minimum Minimum switching load load Pv IMA sss 1mA ae Life Mechanical More than 20 million times Electrical More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage current Surge suppressor M3 5 x7 Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable solderless t
302. sition OFF Sampling trace in e Turned on upon completion of sampling trace performed i the number of times preset by parameter after STRA SM1043 Man Sampling trace progress l noer p yp completed ON Sampling trace instruction is executed eted Reset when STRAR instruction is executed oO ES Wa DEDEDE oO fo E E e Turning on off SM803 can execute STRA STRAR instruction STRA SM803 is forcibly turned on off by a peripheral device Same as execution When switched from OFF to ON STRA instruction 5M1044 SM803 Sampling trace STRAR When switched from ON to OFF STRAR instruction Same as execution The value stored in SD1044 is used as the condition for the sampling trace At scanning at time Time 10 ms unit e The SM1015 relay is turned on to reset the WDT when Watchdog timer OFF Does not reset WDT the ZCOM instruction and data communication request WDT reset ON Resets WDT batch processing are executed used when the scan time SM1045 exceeds 200 ms d OFF Trace not in progress Ea e SM1046 SM802 Sampling trace ON Trace in progress Switched on during sampling trace Sampling trace OFF Sampling trace e Sampling trace is not executed unless SM801 is turned SM1047 SM801 ping suspended ON preparations ON Sampling trace started e Sampling trace is suspended when SM801 goes OFF Select
303. special function modules except for the QI60 A1SI61 that can initiate an interrupt to the CPU module have been installed 13 or more special function modules not counting the Al61 capable of sending an interrupt to the CPU module have been installed 2101 o Make setting again to match the parameter I O assignment with the QCPU function Ver B or later actual loading status 1 Reset the parameter I O allocation setting to conform to the actual status of the intelligent function module and the CPU module 2 Delete the general purpose switch settings Reset the parameter I O allocation setting to conform with the actual QnA status of the special function modules Keep the number of A series special function modules that can QCPU initiate an interrupt except for the QI60 A1SI61 to 12 or fewer Keep the number of special function modules that can initiate an QnA interrupt with the exception of the Al61 module to 12 or fewer 7 or more A1SD515S have been installed Keep the number of A1SD51S to 6 or fewer QCPU 2102 7 or more computer link modules excludes A 1S J71QC24 have been installed 1 Two or more QI60 A1SI61 modules are loaded in a single PLC system 2 Two or more QI60 A1SI61 modules are set to the same control PLC in a multiple CPU system 3 Two or more A1SI61 modules are loaded in a multiple CPU system Two or more QI60 A1SI61 interrupt modules have been installed Install only 1 QI60
304. status Turns on when in the STOP status S New Each END SM1654 PAUSE contact PAUSE status Turns on when in the PAUSE status S New Each END SM1655 STEP RUN contact STEP RUN status e Turns on when in the STEP RUN status S New Each END 1 Stores other system CPU diagnostic information and system information 2 This shows the special relay SM _ _ for the host system CPU 11 61 11 61 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 12 For redundant system tracking for Q4AR only Either the backup mode or the second mode is valid for SM1700 to SM1799 All is turned off for standalone system M1736 end flag ON Transmission SM1736 change M1737 end SM1737 SM1738 SM1739 Block 28 M1740 SM1740 M1741 SM1741 M1742 SM1742 M1743 SM1743 M1744 SM1744 M1745 SM1745 M1746 SM1746 M1747 SM1747 M1748 SM1748 M1749 SM1749 M1750 SM1750 M1751 SM1751 M1752 SM1752 M1753 SM1753 M1754 SM1754 M1755 SM1755 M1756 SM1756 M1757 SM1757 M1758 SM1758 M1759 SM1759 has been completed Number Name Meaning Explanation TER M Mafa o ge OFF Execution not SM1700 Deag execution ON Geer e Turns on when tracking is executed normally oe New possible SM1726 SM1727 SM1728 M1729 SM1730 SM1731 SM1731 Block 20 M1732 SM1733 ISM1734 FF Transmission SM1734 Block 23 _ lock 23 Transmission trigger ee SM1735 One eean turns on when we S status corresponding data transmission New Q4AR M1738 SM1739 11 62 11 62
305. struct mechanical damage preventing interlock circuits such as emergency stop protective circuits positioning upper and lower limits switches and interlocking forward reverse operations 2 When the PLC detects the following problems it will stop calculation and turn off all output in the case of a In the case of b it will stop calculation and hold or turn off all output according to the parameter setting Note that the AnS series module will turn off the output in either of cases a and b a The power supply module has over current protection equipment and over voltage protection equipment b The PLC CPUs self diagnosis functions such as the watch dog timer error detect problems In addition all output will be turned on when there are problems that the PLC CPU cannot detect such as in the I O controller Build a fail safe circuit exterior to the PLC that will make sure the equipment operates safely at such times See section 9 1 of this manual for example fail safe circuits 3 Output could be left on or off when there is trouble in the outputs module relay or transistor So build an external monitoring circuit that will monitor any single outputs that could cause serious trouble DESIGN PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER When overcurrent which exceeds the rating or caused by short circuited load flows in the output module for a long time it may cause smoke or fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit
306. such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not possible after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of chance loss and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi chance losses lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products damages and secondary damages caused from special reasons regardless of Mitsubishi s expectations compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other duties 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior n
307. t ace A 19 R Remote RUN PAUSE Contact 4 3 S Specifications Base um 6 1 Batey onc nenatis 7 2 O a E E E A E 4 1 Extension Cable sonzoasa nu 6 2 Generalities ote date etd 3 1 Memor Card 7 1 Power supply module s s s 5 1 System configuration Configured equipment 2 1 ED een iasaeun nnsa rasain iis 2 4 Peripheral device AAA 2 3 Index 2 T Tightening torque Of SCrEW sses 9 9 Total number of instructions eee 4 1 W Weight Base EE 6 1 el EE 7 2 CGP es eas tds Mee as dtl Oh is 4 3 Extension Cable er 6 3 Memory Card 7 1 Power supply mocdule 5 2 Wiring Extension cafe AAA 2 3 Heat generation cccceceececseeeseeeeeeeeeeees 9 6 reel EE 9 24 Power supply mocdule 9 22 9 25 Wiring of the I O module s eseseeeeeeene 9 24 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before starting use 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the dealer or Mitsubishi Service Company Note that if repairs are required at a site overseas on a detached island or remote place expenses to dispatch an engineer shall be charged for Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated pl
308. t it conforms to the station number of the module that is actually linked Reduce the number of special function modules installed x When the expansion mode is used Reduce the number of modules to four or less in the whole multiple CPU system 1 Keep the number to 4 or fewer 2 Keep the number to 4 or fewer 3 Check the network numbers and station numbers 1 Install 4 or fewer modules 2 Install 2 or fewer modules 3 Reduce the total number of modulees to 4 or less 4 Check the network Nos and station Nos 5 Check the station Nos Change network module to QU71LP21 or QU71BR11 Change network module to A 1s J71QLP21 or A 1s J71QBR11 Check the module configuration of the standby system Q4AR 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x 6 This can only be detected in the redundant system standby system 11 24 11 24 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual Operating were feo i Error Messages ee Information LED lEDStatus lEDStatus Lt of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 SD16 to 26 gt x 1 ERROR Stop SP UNIT ERROR Unit module No Program error location Off On Flicker On Continue When instruction executed x2 2111 2112 Unit module No Stop SP UNIT ERROR Program error location Off On Flicker On Continue When instruction executed 2 STOP RUN 21
309. t module Waa 0 W 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q f Average power consumption due to voltage drop in the output section of the output module WOUT 0 W g Average power consumption of the input section of the input module WIN 0 004 x 24 x 32 x 1 3 07 W h Power consumption of the power supply section of the intelligent function module Ws 0 W i Power consumption of overall system W 3 84 8 97 0 0 3 07 0 15 88 W 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 3 Module Installation 9 3 1 Precaution on installation Ab CAUTION Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in this manual Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation and damage to or deterioration of the product Hold down the module loading lever at the module bottom and securely insert the module fixing latch into the fixing hole in the base unit Incorrect loading of the module can cause a malfunction failure or drop When using the PLC in the environment of much vibration tighten the module with a screw Tighten the screw in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module When installing more cables be sure that the base unit and the module connectors
310. t module and then the PLC power supply is switched on the DC output module may provide false output instantaneously at power on of the PLC Therefore it is necessary to make up a circuit that can switch on the PLC power supply first Also an abnormal operation may be performed if an external power supply fault or PLC failure takes place To prevent any of these abnormal operations from leading to the abnormal operation of the whole system and in a fail safe viewpoint areas which can result in machine breakdown and accidents due to abnormal operations e g emergency stop protective and interlock circuits should be constructed outside the PLC The following page gives examples of system designing in the above viewpoint 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 1 System design circuit example when not using ERR contact of power supply module POWER SUPPLY power FORAC FOR AC DC SUPPLY S Ee Input switched E TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER oe 500 H FUSE established RUSE PUSE H V CPU MODULE T E G D king 7 q SM52 POWER PEH RUN STOP circuit SM403 f G interlocked with RA1 ee El run monitor relay M H FUSE r NS i Set time for DC l power supply to be established SEN rae aaa C1 j pan See eH 3 JGRAN i GM eo eo Lo O QO OUTPUT MODULE Low battery alarm Ym
311. t network No of the 1st module installed D341 D342 S No n nN IO n n n n n g g g oO o w CG CG bei d a E CA ei EES g S Q bel Ke Zz e e Ethernet group No of the 1st module installed Ethernet station No of the 1st module installed S Initial Vacant With High Performance model QCPU the Ethernet IP address of the 1st module is stored in buffer memory Vacant With High Performance model QCPU the Ethernet error code of the 1st module is read with the ERRORRD instruction D34 Infi ion from 2n ele EECH d Configuration is identical to that for the first module D354 D Infi ion from 3r ans SECH Configuration is identical to that for the first module D362 to Information from Configuration is identical to that for the first module D368 4th module No of D340 EE Indicates the number of modules installed on Ethernet D341 O No Ethernet I O No of the 1st module installed Ethernet network No of the 1st module installed D343 Y CG fo Ss n D344 No n D345 to D346 Ethernet information n D347 ce SEA E a ZIE oO oO GR Di Di O O Di Di n 3 a E 2 ba a n n D342 Zz ai S E No n D343 Q bel E Ke E O Le Ethernet group No of the 1st module installed n EH 2 fo EI D344 No Ethernet station No of the 1st module installed SEH Ethernet D346 information IP address Ve Ethernet IP addres
312. t up to 64 modules b The overall distance of the extension cables is up to 13 2m to ensure high degree of extension base unit arrangement 8 Memory extension by memory card The High Performance model QCPU is provided with a memory card installation connector to which a memory card of 32 Mbyte max can be connected 32 Mbyte is available when a ATA card is used When a memory card of large capacity is installed a large capacity of file can be controlled comments to all data devices can be set up and the programs in the past can be stored in the memory as they are in the form of the corrected histories If a memory card is not installed a program can be stored onto the standard ROM built in the CPU module and file registers can be handled by the standard RAM e The number of file registers that can be handled changes depending on the function version serial number of the CPU module used CPU Module Type Number of File Registers Q02CPU 32k points QO2HCPU First 5 digits of serial number are 04011 or earlier 32k points QO6HCPU Piret 5 digits of serial number are 04012 or later 64k points Q12HCPU First 5 digits of serial number are 02091 or earlier 32k points Q25HCPU Piret 5 digits of serial number are 02092 or later 128k points Refer to Section 2 3 to confirm the function version and serial number of the High Performance model QCPU 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 9 Data can be written automatically to standar
313. t with an extension cable The system will not operate properly if the extension cable is connected in the form of IN to IN OUT to OUT or IN to OUT When connecting two or more extension base units plug the OUT side connector of the first extension base unit and the IN side connector of the second extension base unit with an extension cable 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q a To connect an extension cable to the main base unit remove the portion under the OUT characters on the base cover with a tool such as a flat blade screwdriver 5 5 x 75 6 x 100 This also applies to a case where an extension cable is connected to the OUT side connector of the extension base unit OUT side of extension base unit Main base unit ei IN OUT Base cover H elZ e x 5 b To connect the extension cable to the next extension base unit remove the seal applied under the IN characters on the base cover IN side of extension base unit c When plugging the extension cable to any base unit hold the connector part of the extension cable Be d After fitting the extension cable always tighten the extension cable connector fixing screws Tightening torque 20N cm he 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION Z g MELSEC Q 3 Disconnection of extension cable When unplugging the extension cable hold and pull the connector part of the extension cable afte
314. taken continuously 41F2H The specified drive is ROM Check the specified drive Format it for RAM The same starting source has already opened 41FBu ES ae g es Check if it is being processed by another application the specified file C Cc 41E1H The address or sector is not found Check if the target is a ROM drive or not 41E8n The drive format information is illegal Format the target drive C An attempt was made to erase the mounted 41FCH Execute again after dismounting the drive 41FDH The Flash ROM is not formatted Erase the specified drive 41FEH The memory card is not inserted Insert or reinsert the memory card 41FFu The memory card type differs Check the memory card type 1 The specified station could not be accessed because a routing parameter was not set in 1 Set the routing parameter for accessing the specified AA the related station station in the related station 2 Though routing via the multiple CPU system 2 Try after a while Or check if the system relaying the Link related is attempted the control CPU of the network data is active then start communication error module that relays the data is not active 4A01H The network with the No set in the routing Check the routing parameter set in the related station parameter does not exist and make a correction A Check if an error has occurred in the network module 4A02H Cannot access the specified station and if the module is offline F _ Check if an
315. te the limit for each PID loop as fo D774 E bes B15 TO Pair VE SD774 Loop16 to U New QCPU 1 Limit not set setting SD775 Loop32 to Selects whether or not the data is refreshed when the COM instruction is executed b15 b14 to b5 Bits 0 to 4 Refresh 0 Do not processing selection when the COM F bit 0 Refresh 1 Do not refresh b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 refresh p778 1 0 o 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Refresh QCPU Serial number 04012 or later UO refresh CC Link refresh U New MELSECNET H refresh Automatic refresh of intelligent function modules Automatic refresh of multi CPU shared memory General data processing instruction is executed 02 n el el Eat Eat N N a 11 83 11 83 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Ee MELSEC Q Special Register List 7 Debug Remaining No of simultaneous SD execution of 0 to 32 CC Link dedicated instruction SD Mask pattern TO of IMASK Mask pattern SD instruction Status latch file name Status latch file name 780 781 793 811 SD Explanation Stores the remaining number of simultaneous execution of the CC Link dedicated instructions Stores the mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction as follows B15 B1 BO 163 149 148 179 165 164 Stores file name with extension from point in time when status latch was conducted as
316. te to standard ROM e Enforced ON OFF for external I O e Remote password setting e Increased standard RAM capacity of Q12HCPU Q25HCPU e Compatibility with MELSECNET H remote I O network e Interrupt module QI60 compatibility e Compatibility with the multiple CPU system Version 6 or later i e Installation of PC CPU module into the 03051 or later multiple CPU system Version 7 or later e High speed interrupt function e Compatibility with index modification for module designation of dedicated instruction e Selection of refresh item for COM 04012 or later instruction e Extended life battery of SRAM card e Compatibility with 2Mbyte SRAM card e Increased standard RAM capacity of QO02HCPU QO6HCPU 02092 or later Version 6 or later 1 For the details of the added functions in Table 1 1 refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 2 Refer to Section 2 3 for the serial No and function version of the High Performance model QCPU 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 1 Features High Performance model QCPU has the following new features 1 Controllable multiple I O points All High Performance model QCPUs support 4096 points X YO to FFF as the number of actual I O points capable of getting access to the I O module installed on the base unit They also support 8192 points max X YO to 1FFF as the number of I O devices which can be used in th
317. te units e Drive 2 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units The use conditions for memory card A are stored as bit patterns In use when ON The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Parameters QPA Device comments QCD Device initial value QDI File register R QDR Trace QTS Not used Not used Not used CPU fault history QFD SFC trace QTS Local device QDL Not used Not used Not used Not used The use conditions for memory card A are stored as bit patterns In use when ON The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Parameters QPA Device comments QCD Device initial value QDI File register R QDR Sampling trace QTS Status latch QTL Program trace QTP Simulation data QDS CPU fault history QFD SFC trace QTS Local device QDL Not used Not used Not used Not used Indicates memory card B models installed B15 B8 B7 B4 B3 Bo a Drive 3 0 Does not exist RAM model 1 SRAM 0 Does not exist Drive 4 1 SRAM ROM model 2 E7PROM 3 Flash ROM Drive 4 is fixed to 3 because it has built in Flash ROM MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU Corresponding CPU QCPU Q Q Set by When set S Initial and card removal S Initial and card removal removal removal removal
318. ted value Stays ON subsequently even after normal operation is restored e Synchronous with BAT ALA BAT LED e Same as SM51 but goes OFF subsequently when S Error battery voltage returns to normal Comes ON it a momentary power interruption of less than 20ms occurred during use of the AC power supply module and reset by turning the power OFF then ON Comes ON if a momentary power interruption of less than 10ms occurred during use of the DC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON Comes ON if a momentary power interruption of less than 1ms occurred during use of the DC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON Goes ON if MINI S3 link error is detected at even one of the installed MELSECNET MINI master modules Stays ON subsequently even after normal operation is restored ON when operation error is generated e Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations restored e Comes ON even if there is only one output module with a blown fuse and remains ON even after return to normal ON Module with blown fuse Blown fuse status is checked even for remote I O station output modules Comes ON if there is a discrepancy between the actual UO modules and the registered information when the power is turned on e MO module verification is also conducted for remote WO station modules Goes ON if even one annunciator F goes ON Goes ON if error is detected by CHK instr
319. telligent function or another module to and from the base unit 1 Installation and removal of the module from Q30B Q50B and Q60B The installation and removal of the module from Q30B Q6LB base unit are described below a Installation of module on Q30B Q50B and Q60B Base unit Base unit Module Insert the module fixing latch into the module fixing hole of the base unit Module connector i Module loading i lever Push the module in the direction of arrow to load it Module into the base unit Module fixing fixing latch hole Module fixing hole JI Make sure that the module is inserted in the base unit securely a Completion D POINTS 1 Always insert the module fixing latch of the module into the module fixing hole Forcing the hook into the hole will damage the module connector and module 2 When using the PLC in a place where there is large vibration or impact screw the CPU module to the base unit Module fixing screw M3 x 12 user prepared 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q b Removal from Q30B Q50B and Q60B Hold the module with both Base unit hands and push the unit fixing hook on the top of the module with a finger until it stops Module connector While pushing the unit fixing hook and using the bottom of the module as a support pull the module toward you Module fixing hole L
320. the 24VDC input line away from the 100VAC and 200VAC lines g Wiring of 200m 686 67 ft or longer distance will give rise to leakage currents due to the line capacity resulting in a fault Refer to Section 11 5 for details 3 Grounding To ground the cable follow the steps a to c shown below a Use the dedicated grounding as far as possible b When a dedicated grounding cannot be performed use 2 Common Grounding shown below PLC Another Another Another equipment equipment equipment grounding grounding 1 Independent grounding Best 2 Common grounding Good 3 Joint grounding Not allowed c For grounding a cable use the cable of 2 mm or more Position the ground contact point as closely to the sequencer as possible and reduce the length of the grounding cable as much as possible 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 6 2 Connecting to the power supply module The following diagram shows the wiring example of power lines grounding lines etc to the main and extension base units Main base unit as 100 110VAC 388 AC HIE Jee Q61P A1 CPU module Xx Fuse V x r IK SC ERR in S LC 24VDC Grp 4O fc k bb RER 1 abd beso okt Heit INPUT 1 HIT lO 100 120VAC vy LV Connect to 24VDC terminals V of UO module that H ires 24VDC internally SE D Extension base unit V Q68B Extension cable
321. timing clock SM431 No 6 SM432 User timing clock User timing clock SM433 No User timing clock SM434 Nog 11 47 zZ Z zZ o o o N oa A Zeie ON a OFF 1 scan ON OFFe e 0 005 sec 0 005 sec After RUN ON for 1 scan only e This connection can be used for scan execution type programs only e After RUN OFF for 1 scan only e This connection can be used for scan execution type programs only e After RUN ON for 1 scan only e This connection can be used for low speed execution type programs only e After RUN OFF for 1 scan only e This connection can be used for low speed execution type programs only Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at 5 ms interval When PLC power supply is turned OFF or a CPU module reset is performed goes from OFF to start Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at each designated time interval e When PLC power supply is turned OFF or a CPU module reset is performed goes from OFF to start e Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program Goes between ON and OFF in accordance with the number of seconds designated by SD414 e When PLC power supply is turned OFF or a CPU module reset is performed goes from OFF to start
322. ting status change status control on the running PLC read the manual carefully and fully confirm safety Especially for the above control on the remote PLC from an external device an immediate action may not be taken for PLC trouble due to a data communication fault In addition to configuring up the interlock circuit in the sequence program corrective and other actions to be taken as a system for the occurrence of a data communication fault should be predetermined between the external device and PLC CPU A CAUTION Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100 mm 3 94 inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation When controlling items like lamp load heater or solenoid valve using an output module large current approximately ten times greater than that present in normal circumstances may flow when the output is turned OFF to ON Take measures such as replacing the module with one having sufficient rated current When the PLC power supply is switched ON OFF correct control output may not be performed temporarily due to differences in delay time and starting time between the PLC power supply and the external power supply for the controlled object especially DC For example if the external power supply for the controlled object is switched on in a DC outpu
323. tion instruction Remains on if normal status is flag ON Error restored OFF Carry OFF M9012 SM1012 SM700 Carry flag ON Carry ON Carry flag used in application instruction Data memo OFF Ignored Clears the data memory including the latch range other M9016 SM1016 Yy g than special relays and special registers in remote run clear flag ON Qutput claered mode from computer etc when SM1016 is on 3 Clears the unlatched data memory other than special Data memory OFF Ignored 3 M9017 SM1017 relays and registers in remote run mode from computer clear flag ON Output claered etc when SM1017 is on M9020 Leven BE timing clock 0 e Relay which repeats on off at intervals of predetermined M9021 SM1021 GC timing clock scan o e When power is turned on or reset is per formed the clock M9022 SM1022 Us r timing l ck starts with off GN No 2 Set the intervals of on off by DUTY instruction User timing clock M9024 SM1024 G A eet timing clock Clock data set OFF Ignored e Writes clock data from SD1025 to SD1028 to the clock M9025 SM1025 racuest ON a raqliestpresani used element after the END instruction is executed during the q SEH scan in which M1025 has changed from off to on OFF No error A M9026 SM1026 Clock data error ON Error e Switched on by clock data SD1025 to SD1028 error p e Clock data is read from SD1025 to SD1028 and month M9027 SM1027 Dee Hale Ge che day hour minute and mi
324. truction for changed scan is written to the clock device OFF No error e ON when error is generated in clock data SD210 to IME Set error D213 value and OFF if no error is detected SEH Ge Clock data OFF Ignored e Displays clock data as month day hour minute and M9027 SA i ON Display second at the LED display at front of CPU module Ea Clock data read OFF Ignored e When this relay is ON clock data is read to SD210 to eet ON Read request D213 as BCD values seg O Rem Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 1 is canceled No 1 CPU reset OFF PLC No 1 reset cancel Le Comes ON when the PLC No 1 is resetting including flag ON PLC No 1 resetting the case where the PLC is removed from the base unit The other PLCs are also put in reset status Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 2 is canceled Comes ON when the PLC No 2 is resetting including the case where the PLC is removed from the base unit The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 3 is canceled Comes ON when the PLC No 3 is resetting including the case where the PLC is removed from the base unit The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 4 is canceled S Status QCPU Comes ON when the PLC No 4 is resetting including function the case where the PLC is removed from the base unit change Ver B The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DO
325. uction Stays ON subsequently even after normal operation is restored Goes ON when measurement of step transition watchdog timer is commenced e Resets watchdog timer when it goes OFF i e S m S Instruction execution S Error S Error M9007 M9006 S Error M9005 S Error M9004 S Error M9011 S Error M9000 S Error M9002 S S Instruction New execution M9108 M9109 M9110 M9111 M9112 M9113 M9114 e e New EEN SIS 11 43 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List 2 System information pares when LED OFF i e When this relay goes from OFF to ON the LEDs Se ee corresponding to the individual bits at SD202 go off SM203 STOP contact _ STOP status Goes ON at STOP status ES M9042 S Status SM204 PAUSE contact PAUSE status Goes ON at PAUSE status change M9041 SM205 STEP RUN STEP RUN status Goes ON at STEP RUN status Side M9054 contact Ea PAUSE enable OFF PAUSE disabled PAUSE status is entered if this relay is ON when the meoo coil ON PAUSE enabled remote PAUSE contact goes ON Device test OFF Device test not yet request y Comes ON when the device test mode is executed on executed S Request Remote acceptance i GX Developer status ON Device test executed f When this relay goes from OFF to ON clock data being Kee Kee stored from SD210 to SD213 after execution of END U M9025 request ON Set request i ie ins
326. ules and special function modules 14 2 4 Modules that have mounting restrictions 14 2 5 Usable GX Developers and GX Configurators 14 2 6 Parameters that enable the use of multiple CPU systems 14 2 7 Resetting the multiple CPU system 14 2 8 Processing when High Performance model QCPU stop errors occur 14 2 9 Reducing the time required for multiple CPU system processing 15 ALLOCATING MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM I O NUMBERS 15 1 Concept behind Allocating I O Numbers 15 1 1 I O modules and intelligent function module I O numbers 15 1 2 I O number of High Performance model QCPU Motion CPU and PC CPU module 15 2 Purpose of PC Parameter I O Allocations with the GX Developer 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM S QCPUS AND MOTION CPUs 16 1 Automatic Refresh of Common CPU Memory 16 2 Communication with Multiple CPU Commands and Intelligent Function Module Devices 16 3 Interactive Communications between The High Performance model QCPU and Motion CPU 16 3 1 Control instructions from the High Performance model QCPU to the Motion CPU 16 3 2 Reading and writing device data 16 4 Common CPU Memory 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES 17 1 Range of Control PLC Communications 17 2 Range of Non control PLC Communications 18 PROCESSING TIME FOR MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPUs 18 1 Concept behind QCPU Scanning Time 18 2 Factor to Prolong the Scan Time 19 STARTING UP TH
327. units is zero e 2 The head VO number in the common parameters is different from that of the actually mounted module i 3 The station class for the CC Link module quantity set parameters is different from that of the actually mounted station Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action MELSEC Q Corres ponding CPU 1 Delete the MELSECNET H network parameter of the MELSECNET H under control of another station 2 Change the setting to the first O number of the MELSECNET H under control of the host station QCPU function Ver B or later Reset the CPU module Check the network parameters and the installation state If inconsistency is found arrange consistency between network rameters and the installation state _ f network parameters are changed write the new network arameters to the CPU module y heck the number of extension stages of the extension base unit Check the state of connection of the extension base unit and connector If the display unit is connected to the main base unit or extension base unit check the state of connection If the error persists after the above items 1 through 3 are checked the hardware is faulty Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative and explain the symptom Write after correcting network parameters If the error persists after corrections have been made contact our nearest Mitsubishi representative Change the file register file for the one refres
328. unting this base unit onto the panel of the control panel for M4 screw DIN rail adapter Module connector Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter mounting hole 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 2 Slim type main base unit Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Connector for installing the power supply module CPU module I O modules and intelligent function module To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module QG60 to prevent entry of dirt oy Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit Screw size M3 x 12 3 Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel of the control panel for M4 screw DIN rail adapter 7 4 f Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter mounting hole 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 3 Extension base unit Q5 L B Q6 L B QA1S6 L B Connectors for sending a
329. ut Leakage Es Input module Power supply e Drive by switch with LED indicator DC input plus common Leakage curent Input module Connect an appropriate resistor which will make the voltage across the terminals of the input module lower than the OFF voltage AC input Input module It is recommended to use 0 1 to 47 UF 47 to 120Q 1 2W for the CR constant e Same as Example 1 e Or make up another independent display circuit e Same as Example 1 e However leakage current is not generated when the power supply is located in the input equipment side as shown below AC input Input module _ Power supply e Connect a register which will make the voltage between the input module terminal and common lower than the OFF voltage as shown below DC input plus common Resistor E Input module A calculation example of a value for a connected resistor is given on the following page 11 38 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Input Circuit Problems and Corrective Actions Continued Condition Cause Corrective Action e Sneak path due to the use of two power e Use only one power supply supplies Connect a sneak path prevention diode Input signal Figure below does not Input modul turn OFF rr 1O 2 a E o Ee LI Input module Change response time setting Example ims 5ms Setting of a shorter response time may produce a higher effect on peri
330. ut action of the step being held when a block is ended by executing the end step All coil outputs go OFF when this relay is OFF e Coil outputs are preserved when this relay is ON Low speed execution type program ON for 1 scan only after RUN e Stores the status of the intelligent function module access instruction executed immediately before This information will be overwritten when the intelligent function module access instruction is executed again This flag is used by the user in a program as the completion bit 11 46 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 System clocks counters Special Relay List MELSEC Q Corresponding v9 OL sn gt S SM400 Always ON e Normally is ON Every END processing SM401 Always OFF ON e Normally is OFF opt Y ON 1 scan Dsg ON for 1 scan alee only after RUN for 1 scan only Low speed execution type SM404 program ON for 1 scan only after RUN Low speed execution type SM405 program After RUN OFF for 1 scan only SM409 0 01 second clock pue 0 2 second clock sm2 1 second clock SM414 2n second clock n n S IS 1 S BR RI SR Sr ere Hl zl e n R are w N D O o S a Q O be x Ei an e n fon Q fo bei a Q fo be x SM415 2n ms clock EES E User timing clock SM420 No 0 SM421 User timing clock User timing clock SM422 No 2 User timing clock SM423 No 3 SM424 User timing clock SM430 User timing clock No User
331. uted 4201 FOR NEXT ERROR Program error location When instruction is executed x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x 2 The CPU module operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 11 31 11 31 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres EOF Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action ponding SDO 1 CPU QCPU function Ver B or later Check the parameter setting ER QCPU The refresh setting of the intelligent function module exceeded the file register capacity The intelligent function module s refresh parameter setting is outside the available range 3302 The intelligent function module s refresh parameter are abnormal Check the parameter setting In a multiple CPU system automatic refresh setting or similar parameter setting was made to the intelligent function module under control of another station 3400 The first O number of the target module in the remote password file is set to other than Ox to OFFOu Position specified as the first O number of the remote password file is incorrect due to one of the following reasons e Module is not loaded e Other than a Q compatible intelligent function module I O A QnA Load the QJ71C24 R2 or Q series Ethernet interface module of module Intelligent function module other than QJ71C24 R2 or Q series Ethernet interfa
332. ution of program S Status SM828 New error ON Errors trace change 8 Latch area R meee SS SM900 Power cut file OFF No power cut file e Goes ON if a file is present during access when power is S U ON Power cut file present interrupted chi OFF Keyboard input RKEY notregistered Goes ON at registration of keyboard input registration flag ON Keyboard input OFF if keyboard input is not registered Status ange Instruction execution registered 11 51 11 51 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 9 A to Q QnA conversion correspondences Special relays SM1000 to SM1255 are the relays which correspond to ACPU special relays M9000 to M9255 after A to Q QnA conversion All of these special relays are controlled by the system so that users cannot turn them ON OFF in the program If users want to turn these relays ON OFF the program should be modified to use QCPU QnACPU special relays For SM1084 and SM1200 through SM1255 however if a user can turn ON OFF some of special relays M9084 and M9200 through M9255 before conversion the user can also turn ON OFF the corresponding relays among SM1084 and SM1200 through SM1255 after the conversion For details on the ACPU special relays see the user s manuals for the individual CPUs and MELSECNET or MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manuals The processing time may be longer when converted special relays are used with QCPU Uncheck A series CPU compatibility sett
333. utomatic write to standard Automatic write to standard ROM ae e EE e WE ee aE wee Ge Compatibility with MELSECNET H remote I O network interrupt n module QI60 compatibrity Set fete le System a CPU system High speed neng speed interrupt Compatibility with index modification e module designation of dedicated instruction Selection of refresh item for COM Y x y x gt instruction Available lt N A For function details refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals App 16 App 16 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 3 3 Added functions and the corresponding GX Developer versions App 17 bessien seg el x _o Oo EES ESES EES ON OFF Deeg Remote Remote password setting setting Compatibility with MELSECNETH H remote I O network Interrupt module QI60 compatibility Compatibility with the multiple CPU system Installation of PC CPU module into the Ee CPU system High speed interrupt speed interrupt Compatibility with index modification for module designation of dedicated instruction aa ES EC instruction Available x N A Function not related to GX Developer App 17 INDEX Ind A Allowable momentary power failure period 4 3 ANS SENES enee Tae rearea A 12 B Base unit EXt NSlON etade niia 2 3 6 5 6 6 External dimensions diagram App 9 to App 13 I
334. utput module using external wiring 6 Terminal screw M3 5 x 7 screw Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block a Medi ting screw roie Used to fix the module to the base unit M3 x 12 screw user prepared 8 Module fixing screw hole Tightening torque 36 to 48Necm Used to load the module into the base unit Used to connect a 100VAC power supply Used to connect a 200VAC power supply Used to connect a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply 13 Used to connect a 24VAC power supply 14 Used to connect a 100VAC 200VAC power supply POINTS 1 The Q61P A1 is dedicated for inputting a voltage of 100 VAC Do not input a voltage of 200 VAC into it or trouble may occur on the Q61P A1 Power Supply power voltage module type 100VAC 200VAC P l l Q61P A1 Operates normally EE S Power supply module does not cause trouble 1P A2 lly so CPU module cannot be Operates morally operated 2 Q64P automatically switches the input range 100 200VAC Therefore it is not compatible with the intermediate voltage 133 to 169VAC The CPU module may not work normally if the above intermediate voltage is applied 3 Ensure that the earth terminals LG and FG are grounded 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q 2 A1S61PN A1S62PN and A1S63P 9 9 9 MELSECAtse61PN MELSECAtse2Pn MELSECA ise3P POWER O POWER O4 1 MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI INPUT OUTPUT
335. value Enabled only jand time over 0 to 255 setting u SD95 Corresponds to SM95 D9113 when SFC error 1 to 255 s SD96 program Corresponds to SM96 1 s units D9114 SE exists Gor nds to SM97 e Timer is started by turning SM90 through N TE SM99 ON during active step and if the SE SD98 Corresponds to SM98 transition conditions for the relevant steps are not met within the timer limits the designated SD99 Corresponds to SM99 annunciator F will go ON New CH1 transmission ltransmission 3 300bps 6 600bps 24 2400bps 48 4800bps QCPU SD105 Geen lensed when 96 9600bps 192 19 2kbps 384 38 4kbps S New Ba 576 57 6kbps 1152 115 2kbps RS 232 GX Developer p r is used 11 70 11 70 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Q Special Register List 2 System information Set by Number Name Meanin Explanation oy RENE we et e The switch status of the remote I O module is stored in the following format B15 B4 B3 l S Always Remote 4 Vacant 1 Remote I O module switch status Always 1 STOP The CPU module switch status is stored in the following format B15 B12B11 B8 Di B4B3 BO lt CPU switch status S Every END Memory card switch Always OFF processing DIP switch B8 through BC correspond to SW1 through SW5 of system setting switch 1 0 OFF 1 ON BD through BF are vacant Status of CPU e The CPU module switch status is stored in the following format
336. x A9GT QCNB is required Since the A9GT QCNB is supplied with 5VDC from the power supply module loaded on the main base unit 29mA must be added to Im as the current consumption of the A9GT QCNB For details of the GOT bus connection refer to the GOT A900 Series User s Manual Connection 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY This section describes the specifications and handling of the memory card and battery which can be used on the High Performance model QCPU The memory card is necessary for sampling tracing The memory card is also used to handle file registers of more than the number of points that can be stored in the standard RAM Refer to Section 4 1 7 1 Memory Card Specifications The specifications of the memory card which can be used on the High Performance model QCPU adheres to the PCMCIA small PC card On the High Performance model QCPU only one memory card can be installed 1 SRAM card A TI ee ee Memory capacity after format 1011 5 kbyte 2034 kbyte Storable number of files Number of insertions and extractions 5000 times 45mm 1 77inch External dimensions 42 8mm 1 69inch I bD 3 3mm 0 13inch 15g 2 Flash card 7 5000 times H 45mm 1 77inch External dimensions 42 8mm 1 69inch 3 3mm 0 13inch 3 ATA card Pe TE Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA Memory capacity after format 7940 kbyte 15932 n 31854 kbyte Storable number of files Nu
337. ximity of solderless terminals Check visually Solderless terminals must ei Correct to eachother positioned at proper intervals Sooseness of Check visually Connectors must not be loose Further tighten connector connectors fixing screws Even if the lowering of a battery capacity is not shown replace the battery with a new one if a specified service life of the battery is exceeded Dirt and foreign matter must Remove and clean not be present Check visually Connection check on the monitor mode of the GX Developer that SM51 or Preventive maintenance SM52 is turned OFF x1 When AnS Series Module is included in the system the judgement criteria will be from 10 to 90 RH 10 3 10 3 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 3 Battery Replacement 10 4 When the voltage of the program and power interrupt hold on function backup battery is lowered the special relays SM51 and SM52 are energized Even if these special relays are energized the contents of the program and power interrupt hold on function are not erased immediately If the energization of these relays is recognized however these contents may be deleted unintentionally While a total of the power interrupt hold on time after the SM51 is energized is within a specified time replace the battery with a new one POINTS The SM51 is used to give an alarm when the capacity of the battery is lowered Even after it is energized the data i
338. xternal ARE external power 15 14 13 12 11 10 po PPY supply has been D1350 0 olo 1 o o disconnected module disconnected SD1351 olo oli 0 External power For future Su Ee SSC expansion 5 0 a SCH 3 disconnected Sg ee 1 External power supply is not 1 0 0 0 o o o0 o ojo disconnected C Indicates a blown fuse 11 97 11 97 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue 12 I O module verification Sien edel Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU SC g e When the power is turned on the module numbers of the I O modules whose information differs from the registered I O module Bit pattern in information are set in this register in units of 16 points units of 16 points If the WO numbers are set by parameter the parameter set indicating the numbers are stored ith Also detects I O module information D1405 UO module modules wit 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 4 0 Dr us verification errors D1406 _ verification 0 No VO D9116 olo D1407 _Jerror 7 D1408 verification D9117 2 cr GA A errors ANN GE 1 WO verification P9123 W d d error present t Indicates an VO module verification error e Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one This flag is cleared by error resetting operation Jajaj jn jon 3 0 NIN NIN New to New 13 For redundant systems Host system CPU information 1 for Q4
339. y be driven by the program If a voltage relay is used at RA2 no timer TM is required in the program 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 2 System design circuit example when using ERR contact of power supply module POWER SS FOR AC DC TRANSFORMER sec RANSFORMER Input switched FUSED j when power supply U MODULE established ll D SM52 POWER Gm SUPPLY RUN STOP circuit Oil interlocked with SM403 CG H HEUSE Set time for DC power supply to be established run monitor relay Voltage relay is recommended T _ Low battery alarm at Lamp or buzzer In awd meee Le mre seen OFF at stop error POWER SUPPLY ERR from ERR MODULE H GA tee ened OUTPUT MODULE Luc Eme Interlock circuits asnecessary e Ny A Provide external interlock Power to output equipment circuits for conflicting operations switched OFF when ERR such as forward rotation and if 7 contact turns OFF reverse rotation and for parts MC2 that could damage the machine 4 0 4 fic l In the case of an or cause accidents if no interlock emergency stop or a stop were used hb MC1 caused by a limit switch t fic 4 The power ON procedure is as follows For AC DC 1 Switch power ON 2 Set CPU to RUN 3 When DC power is established RA2 goes ON 4 Timer TM times out after the DC power reaches 100 The
340. ype set for an SFC program in the parameters is 3300 Check the parameter setting oer other than the scan execution type The first O number in the intelligent function module parameter set x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 30 11 30 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LED s Operating r T SDO Ge Error Messages Information Information LED Statys Statuses of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 x 1 ERROR CPU D When an END instruction is 3301 executed SP PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Off Flicker Stop At power ON Reset 3303 SP PARA ERROR File name drive name Parameter number SE nue 3400 REMOTE PASS At power ON Reset um ERROR E ES Off Flicker Stop STOP RUN INSTRCT CODE ERR Program error location off Flicker Stop A power OA maser 4010 MSSNGENDNS Program errorlocation __ om Fie Sop 4020 Eea CAN T SET P Program error location Off Flicker Stop Ai power ON Reset 4021 STOP RUN d 4100 4101 Program error location Program error location 4102 Program error location 2 OPERATION ERROR Flicker On When instruction is executed 4103 Stop Program Program error location Continue 4107 2 4108 Stop Program error location cominus ze 4109 FOR NEXT ERROR Program error location Off Flicker When instruction is exec

Mitsubishi Electronics LCD1760VM Computer Monitor User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents